UL Listing File No. S2422Factory Mutual Approval J.I. No. OB2A6.AY

R

LISTED

Fire Systems

August 1999P/N 76-100016-001

PEGAsysIntelligent Suppression-Control

and Fire-Alarm System

Installation, Operation,and Maintenance Manual

®

Document No. PEGAsysAugust 1999

PEGAsysIntelligent Suppression-Control

and Fire-Alarm System

Installation, Operation,And Maintenance Manual

i

This Manual Is To Be Used By Trained Distributors Only

FOREWORD

This manual is intended to clearly and accurately reflect the PEGAsys Fire Alarm/Suppression Control System. This publication de-scribes the operation, installation and maintenance of the PEGAsys Fire Alarm/Suppression Control System, P/Ns 76-100000-501 forSingle-Loop System and 76-100000-600 for Multi-Loop System.

TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONSADA Americans with Disabilities Act

AI Addressable Contact Input Device

AO Addressable Relay Output Device

BPM Beats Per Minute

CCM Central Control Module

CCP Central Control Panel

EDP Electronic Data Processing

EOC Event Output Control

FCP Fire Control Panel

GUI Graphical User Interface

I/O Input/Output

ID Identification

IRI Industrial Risk Insurers

NC Normally Closed

NO Normally Open

NR Not Registered

NYC New York City

P/N Part Number

PAS Positive Alarm Sequence

PC Personnel Computer

PCS PEGAsys Configuration Software

PC Line Power/Communication Line (RX/TX Loop)

PS Power Supply

RCU Remote Control Unit

RTC Real Time Clock

RX/TX Receive Transmit

UL Underwriter Laboratories

VDC Voltage Direct Current

ACCEPTANCES, APPROVALS, AND CERTIFICATIONS

PEGAsys Single-Loop System (P/N 76-100000-501) UL: Underwriters Laboratories Listing File Number S2422. FM: Factory Mutual Engineering Corp. (Factory Mutual System) Approval J.I. Number 3005511 CSFM: Pending. NYC: Pending.

PEGAsys Multi-Loop System (P/N 76-100000-600) UL: Underwriters Laboratories Listing File Number S2422. FM: Factory Mutual Engineering Corp. (Factory Mutual System) Approval J.I. Number 3005511 CSFM: Pending. NYC: Pending.

ii

(THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)

iii

TABLE OF CONTENTSForward ......................................................................................................................................................... iTerms and Abbreviations ................................................................................................................................ iAppendices ................................................................................................................................................... viList of Illustrations .......................................................................................................................................... viiList of Tables ................................................................................................................................................. ixSafety Summary ............................................................................................................................................ x

PARAGRAPH TITLE PAGE

1 GENERAL INFORMATION ................................................................................................................................................1-11-1 Introduction .....................................................................................................................................................................1-11-1.1 System Description ........................................................................................................................................................1-11-1.2 System Components .....................................................................................................................................................1-11-2 Component Description .................................................................................................................................................1-11-2.1 Central Control Module (CCM) .......................................................................................................................................1-11-2.2 Display Module ...............................................................................................................................................................1-11-2.3 Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX) ............................................................................................................................1-21-2.4 Power Supply/Charger Assembly ..................................................................................................................................1-21-2.5 Basic Motherboard .........................................................................................................................................................1-21-2.6 Multi-Loop Motherboard .................................................................................................................................................1-31-2.7 Input/Output Modules .....................................................................................................................................................1-31-2.7.1 Signal Output Module .....................................................................................................................................................1-31-2.7.2 Relay Output Module ......................................................................................................................................................1-31-2.7.3 Agent Release Output Module .......................................................................................................................................1-41-2.7.4 City Tie Module ...............................................................................................................................................................1-41-2.8 Standby Batteries ............................................................................................................................................................1-41-2.9 Intelligent Loop Devices .................................................................................................................................................1-41-2.9.1 SmartOneTM Ionization Detectors ...................................................................................................................................1-41-2.9.2 SmartOne Photoelectric Detectors ................................................................................................................................1-51-2.9.3 SmartOne Heat Detectors .............................................................................................................................................1-51-2.10 SmartOne Detector Bases ............................................................................................................................................1-51-2.11 Addressable Contact Input Devices ..............................................................................................................................1-51-2.12 Addressable Relay Output Devices ...............................................................................................................................1-51-2.13 Model DH-2000 Air Duct Housing ..................................................................................................................................1-51-2.14 Loop Isolator Devices ....................................................................................................................................................1-61-3 System Specification ......................................................................................................................................................1-6

2 OPERATION ....................................................................................................................................................................2-12-1 Introduction .....................................................................................................................................................................2-12-1.1 Mode of Operation ..........................................................................................................................................................2-12-2 Control and Indicators ....................................................................................................................................................2-12-2.1 LCD Display ...................................................................................................................................................................2-12-2.2 Audible Device ................................................................................................................................................................2-22-2.3 Control and Indicator Description ..................................................................................................................................2-22-3 System Security ..............................................................................................................................................................2-22-3.1 Levels of Security ............................................................................................................................................................2-22-3.2 Default Passwords .........................................................................................................................................................2-22-3.3 Entering Passwords ......................................................................................................................................................2-22-4 System Power-Up ..........................................................................................................................................................2-22-5 System Menus ................................................................................................................................................................2-42-5.1 Menu Structure ................................................................................................................................................................2-42-5.2 Accessing the System Menus ........................................................................................................................................2-42-5.3 Exiting the System Menus ..............................................................................................................................................2-42-5.4 Menu Functions ..............................................................................................................................................................2-42-5.4.1 Isolate Menu Function ....................................................................................................................................................2-42-5.4.2 List Menu Function .........................................................................................................................................................2-42-5.4.3 Set Menu Function ..........................................................................................................................................................2-42-5.4.4 Test Menu Function ........................................................................................................................................................2-42-6 Modes of Operation ........................................................................................................................................................2-52-6.1 Normal Standby Mode ....................................................................................................................................................2-52-6.2 Active Alarm Mode ...........................................................................................................................................................2-52-6.2.1 Alarm Mode Indications ..................................................................................................................................................2-52-6.2.2 Alarm Mode User Action .................................................................................................................................................2-5

iv

2-6.3 Active Supervisory Trouble Mode ................................................................................................................................. 2-102-6.3.1 Supervisory Trouble Mode Indication ........................................................................................................................... 2-102-6.3.2 Supervisory Trouble Mode User Action ........................................................................................................................ 2-102-6.4 Active Trouble Mode ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-112-6.4.1 Trouble Mode Indications .............................................................................................................................................. 2-112-6.4.2 Trouble Mode User Action ............................................................................................................................................. 2-112-7 Printing Operation ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-112-8 System Programming ................................................................................................................................................... 2-112-8.1 EOC Programming ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-112-8.1.1 Listing EOC Programming ........................................................................................................................................... 2-122-8.2 RTC Programming ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-122-8.2.1 Listing RTC Programming ........................................................................................................................................... 2-122-8.2.2 Enable/Disable RTC Program Line Numbers ............................................................................................................ 2-122-8.3 Types of Inputs and Outputs ........................................................................................................................................ 2-122-8.3.1 System Inputs ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-122-8.3.2 Remote Control Unit (RCU) ......................................................................................................................................... 2-122-8.3.3 RX/TX Loops ................................................................................................................................................................. 2-122-8.3.4 System Outputs ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-132-8.3.5 System I/O Modules ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-132-8.4 Addressing I/O Modules ............................................................................................................................................... 2-132-8.5 Registering I/O Module Assignments .......................................................................................................................... 2-132-8.5.1 Listing I/O Module Assignment .................................................................................................................................... 2-132-8.6 Addressing RCUs ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-132-8.7 Registering RCUs ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-142-8.7.1 Detector Registration ................................................................................................................................................... 2-142-8.7.2 Addressable Contact Monitor Registration .................................................................................................................. 2-142-8.7.3 Remote Relay Registration .......................................................................................................................................... 2-152-8.7.4 Listing all Registered RCUs ....................................................................................................................................... 2-152-8.7.5 Un-registering RCUs .................................................................................................................................................. 2-15

3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION ..........................................................................................................................................3-13-1 Introduction .....................................................................................................................................................................3-13-2 Overall Block Diagram Description ................................................................................................................................3-13-3 Functional Descriptions .................................................................................................................................................3-23-3.1 Central Control Module ..................................................................................................................................................3-23-3.2 Receiver/Transmitter (RX/TX) Module ............................................................................................................................3-33-3.3 Power Supply/Charger Assembly, Revision A ................................................................................................................3-43-3.4 Power Supply/Charger Assembly, Revision C ...............................................................................................................3-53-3.5 Multi-Loop I/O Motherboard ............................................................................................................................................3-63-3.6 Signal Output Module .....................................................................................................................................................3-73-3.7 Relay Output Module ......................................................................................................................................................3-83-3.8 Agent Release Module ...................................................................................................................................................3-93-3.9 City Tie Module ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-103-3.10 Field Devices ................................................................................................................................................................. 3-113-3.11 SmartOne Ionization Detectors .................................................................................................................................... 3-113-3.12 SmartOne Photoelectric Detectors ............................................................................................................................... 3-113-3.13 SmartOne Heat Detectors ............................................................................................................................................ 3-113-3.14 Addressable Contact Input Devices ............................................................................................................................. 3-113-3.15 Addressable Relay Output Devices ............................................................................................................................. 3-123-3.16 Model DH-2000 Air Duct Housing ................................................................................................................................ 3-123-3.17 Loop Isolator Devices .................................................................................................................................................. 3-12

4 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE .........................................................................................................................................4-14-1 Introduction .....................................................................................................................................................................4-14-2 Scheduled Maintenance ................................................................................................................................................4-14-3 Maintenance Procedures ...............................................................................................................................................4-14-3.1 Lamp Test .......................................................................................................................................................................4-14-3.2 Loop Device Test ............................................................................................................................................................4-14-3.3 Battery Test .....................................................................................................................................................................4-14-3.4 Walk Test ........................................................................................................................................................................4-2

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)PARAGRAPH TITLE PAGE

v

4-3.4.1 Walk Testing Detectors ..................................................................................................................................................4-24-3.4.2 Walk Test Procedure ......................................................................................................................................................4-24-3.5 Alarm Simulation Test (AST) ..........................................................................................................................................4-24-3.5.1 AST Procedure ...............................................................................................................................................................4-34-4 Disarming and Rearming Release Circuits ..................................................................................................................4-34-4.1 Disarming Release Circuits ..........................................................................................................................................4-34-4.2 Arming Release Circuits ................................................................................................................................................4-34-5 Power-Down System......................................................................................................................................................4-34-5.1 Power-Down Procedure .................................................................................................................................................4-34-6 Power-Up System ..........................................................................................................................................................4-44-6.1 Power-Up Procedure ......................................................................................................................................................4-4

5 TROUBLESHOOTING AND CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE .............................................................................................5-15-1 Introduction .....................................................................................................................................................................5-15-2 Standard Fault Isolation Techniques .............................................................................................................................5-15-2.1 Visual Inspection ............................................................................................................................................................5-15-2.2 Power Checks ................................................................................................................................................................5-15-3 Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................................................5-15-4 Removal and Replacement ...........................................................................................................................................5-25-4.1 Required Tools ...............................................................................................................................................................5-25-4.2 Central Control Module ..................................................................................................................................................5-25-4.3 RX/TX Module .................................................................................................................................................................5-25-4.4 Field Devices ..................................................................................................................................................................5-3

6 PARTS LIST ....................................................................................................................................................................6-16-1 Introduction .....................................................................................................................................................................6-1

7 INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................................................................7-17-1 Introduction .....................................................................................................................................................................7-17-2 Materials Required For Installation ................................................................................................................................7-17-3 Installation Procedure For Central Control Panel .........................................................................................................7-17-4 Installation Procedure For Expansion Enclosures ........................................................................................................7-17-5 Installation Procedure For I/O Motherboard ...................................................................................................................7-27-6 Installation Procedure For Rx/Tx Module (Multi-Loop Only) ...........................................................................................7-27-7 Installation of I/O Modules ..............................................................................................................................................7-37-7.1 Signal Audible Output Module ........................................................................................................................................7-37-7.2 Relay Output Module ......................................................................................................................................................7-47-7.3 Agent Release Module ...................................................................................................................................................7-47-7.4 City-Tie Output Module ...................................................................................................................................................7-47-7.6 Power Supply/Charger Assembly ..................................................................................................................................7-47-7.7 Power Supply/Charger Assembly, Expansion Enclosure ..............................................................................................7-47-7.8. Power Supply Communication Connections ................................................................................................................7-67-8 Connecting AC Power ....................................................................................................................................................7-67-9 Install And Connect DC Power .......................................................................................................................................7-67-9.1 Battery Enclosure ...........................................................................................................................................................7-67-9.2 Batteries .........................................................................................................................................................................7-67-10 Field Device Connection To RX/TX Module ....................................................................................................................7-77-10.1 Wiring the RX/TX PC Line ...............................................................................................................................................7-77-11 Output Signal Connection ..............................................................................................................................................7-97-12 External Power Failure Indicator Connection .............................................................................................................. 7-107-13 Detector Installation ..................................................................................................................................................... 7-107-14 Setting and Adjusting Smoke & Heat Detector Sensitivities ........................................................................................ 7-107-14.1 Setting and Adjusting Smoke and Heat Detector Sensitivity Procedure ..................................................................... 7-107-15 Addressable Contact Input Device Installation ............................................................................................................. 7-117-16 Addressable Relay Output Device Installation ............................................................................................................. 7-117-17 Installation Checkout ..................................................................................................................................................... 7-117-18 Connection of Peripherals ............................................................................................................................................ 7-117-18.1 Connecting a Terminal or Personal Computer ............................................................................................................ 7-117-18.2 Connecting a Printer ..................................................................................................................................................... 7-11

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)PARAGRAPH TITLE PAGE

vi

A POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS ..............................................................................................................................A-1

B SYSTEM EXPANSION .................................................................................................................................................... B-1

C RELEASING APPLICATIONS ......................................................................................................................................... C-1

D NOT USED .................................................................................................................................................................... D-1

E FACTORY MUTUAL SPRINKLER REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................... E-1

F GLOSSARY .....................................................................................................................................................................F-1

G DISPLAY ABBREVIATIONS ............................................................................................................................................ G-1

H INDEX ............................................................................................................................................................................ H-1

I SYSTEM DRAWINGS...................................................................................................................................................... I-1

J PEGAsys NETWORK INTERFACE CARD ...................................................................................................................... J-1

K ADDRESSABLE SIGNAL/SOUNDER ............................................................................................................................ K-1

L REMOTE DISPLAY CONTROL MODULE AND REMOTE DISPLAY MODULE ...............................................................L-1

M ADDRESSABLE ALARMLINE MODULE ........................................................................................................................ M-1

N NETWORKABLE CENTRAL CONTROL MODULE (NCCM) ......................................................................................... N-1

O CENTRAL STATION OPERATION .................................................................................................................................. O-1

APPENDICESAPPENDIX TITLE PAGE

vii

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONSFIGURE TITLE PAGE

1-1 PEGAsys System Overall Diagram ................................................................................................................................1-01-2 Central Control Module (CCM) .......................................................................................................................................1-21-3 Display Module Assembly ..............................................................................................................................................1-21-4 Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX) ............................................................................................................................1-21-5 Power Supply/Charger Assembly ..................................................................................................................................1-21-6 Basic I/O Motherboard ....................................................................................................................................................1-31-7 Multi-Loop I/O Motherboard ............................................................................................................................................1-31-8 Signal Output Module .....................................................................................................................................................1-31-9 Relay Output Module ......................................................................................................................................................1-41-10 Agent Release Output Module .......................................................................................................................................1-41-11 City-Tie Module ...............................................................................................................................................................1-41-12 Battery Enclosure ...........................................................................................................................................................1-41-13 SmartOneTM Detection Device .......................................................................................................................................1-41-14 4-inch Detector Base ......................................................................................................................................................1-51-15 6-inch Detector Base ......................................................................................................................................................1-51-16 Addressable Contact Input Device .................................................................................................................................1-51-17 Addressable Relay Output Device .................................................................................................................................1-51-18 Air Duct Housing ............................................................................................................................................................1-51-19 Loop Isolator, Stand-Alone .............................................................................................................................................1-61-20 Loop Isolator, RX/TX Mount ............................................................................................................................................1-61-21 Loop Isolator, 6 Detector Base Mount ...........................................................................................................................1-6

2-1 System Front Panel ........................................................................................................................................................2-12-2 Level One Menu Structure ..............................................................................................................................................2-62-3 Level Two Menu Structure ...............................................................................................................................................2-7

3-1 Overall Block Diagram, Single-Loop System ................................................................................................................3-13-2 Overall Block Diagram, Multi-Loop System ...................................................................................................................3-13-3 Central Control Module, Details .....................................................................................................................................3-23-4 Receiver/Transmitter Module, Details ...........................................................................................................................3-33-5 Obsolete Power Supply/Charger Assembly, Revision A, Details ..................................................................................3-43-6 Power Supply/Charger Assembly, Revision C, Details .................................................................................................3-53-7 Multi-Loop I/O Motherboard, Details ..............................................................................................................................3-63-8 Signal Output Module, Details .......................................................................................................................................3-73-9 Relay Output Module, Details .........................................................................................................................................3-83-10 Agent Release Output Module, Details ..........................................................................................................................3-93-11 City Tie Module, Details ................................................................................................................................................ 3-103-12 Typical Detector ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-113-13 Addressable Contact Input Device ............................................................................................................................... 3-123-14 Addressable Relay Output Device ............................................................................................................................... 3-123-15 DH-2000 Air Duct Housing ........................................................................................................................................... 3-123-16 Loop Isolator, RX/TX Mount .......................................................................................................................................... 3-133-17 Loop Isolator, Stand-Alone ........................................................................................................................................... 3-133-18 Loop Isolator, 6 Detector Base Mount ......................................................................................................................... 3-13

5-1 Installation for Single Loop ............................................................................................................................................5-25-2 Installation for Multi-Loop ...............................................................................................................................................5-2

7-1 CCP Installation Drawing ...............................................................................................................................................7-17-2 Back Plate, I/O Motherboard & 4 P.S. ..............................................................................................................................7-27-3 Back Plate, 8 P.S. ............................................................................................................................................................7-27-4 Back Plate, 2 I/O Motherboard ........................................................................................................................................7-27-5 Installation for Multi-Loop ...............................................................................................................................................7-37-6 Power Supply/Charger (Rev A), Wiring Diagram ...........................................................................................................7-47-7 Power Supply/Charger (Rev C), Wiring Diagram ..........................................................................................................7-57-8 Power Supply/Charger (Rev A), Wiring Diagram for Expansion Enclosure ..................................................................7-57-9 Power Supply/Charger (Rev C), Wiring Diagram for Expansion Enclosure .................................................................7-57-10 Battery Enclosure ...........................................................................................................................................................7-77-11 Conduit to CCP ...............................................................................................................................................................7-77-12 Shielded Wire to CCP ....................................................................................................................................................7-77-13 Style 4, RX/TX PC Line Connections ..............................................................................................................................7-8

viii

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (CONT.)

FIGURE TITLE PAGE

7-14 Style 6, RX/TX PC Line Connections ..............................................................................................................................7-87-15 Style 6, RX/TX PC Line Connections with Loop Isolators ..............................................................................................7-97-16 Style 7, RX/TX PC Line Connection ................................................................................................................................7-97-17 CCM Printer Port ........................................................................................................................................................... 7-12

ix

LIST OF TABLES

TABLES TITLE PAGE

1-1 System Specification ......................................................................................................................................................1-6

2-1 Controls and Indicators ..................................................................................................................................................2-32-2 Isolate Menu Function ....................................................................................................................................................2-82-3 List Menu Function .........................................................................................................................................................2-82-4 Set Menu Function ..........................................................................................................................................................2-92-5 Test Menu Function ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-10

3-1 Multi-Loop I/O Motherboard Connectors ........................................................................................................................3-63-2 Approved Release Output Devices ................................................................................................................................3-9

5-1 Troubleshooting Index ...................................................................................................................................................5-15-2 RX/TX Configuration Selection .......................................................................................................................................5-3

6-1 PEGAsys System Parts List ...........................................................................................................................................6-1

7-1 RX/TX Configuration Selection .......................................................................................................................................7-37-2 Aux. Power Supply Module Connections to Rev. A .........................................................................................................7-57-3 Aux. Power Supply Module Connections to Rev. C ........................................................................................................7-5

x

SAFETY SUMMARY

Installation Precautions Adherence to the following will aid in problem-free installation with long-term reliability:

Warning - Several different sources of power can be connected to this fire alarm control panel. Disconnect all sources of powerbefore servicing. Control unit and associated equipment may be damaged by removing and/or inserting cards, modules, or intercon-necting cables while the unit is energized. Do not attempt to install, service, or operate this unit until this manual is read and understood.

CAUTION - System Reacceptance Test after Software Changes: To ensure proper system operation, this product must be tested inaccordance with NFPA - 1996 Chapter 7 after any programming operation or change in site-specific software. Reacceptance testing isrequired after any change, addition or deletion of system components, or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardwareor wiring.

All components, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be affected by a change must be 100% tested. In addition,to ensure that other operations are not inadvertently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are not directly affected by the change,up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also be tested and proper system operation verified.

This system meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0 to 49° C and at a relative humidity of 85% RH (non-condensing) @ 30°C.However, the useful life of the systems standby batteries and the electronic components may be adversely affected by extreme tempera-ture ranges and humidity. Therefore, it is recommended that this system and its peripherals be installed in an environment with a nominalroom temperature of 60-80°F.

Like all solid state electronic devices, this system may operate erratically or can be damaged when subjected to lightning inducedtransients. Although no system is completely immune from lightning transients and interference, proper grounding will reduce suscepti-bility. The use of overhead or outside aerial wiring is not recommended due to the increased susceptibility to nearby lightningstrikes. Consult with the Applications Engineering Department if any problems are anticipated or encountered.

Disconnect AC power and batteries prior to removing or inserting circuit boards. Failure to do so can damage circuits.

Remove all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing, reaming, or punching of the enclosure. When possible, make all cableentries from the sides. Before making modifications, verify that they will not interfere with battery and printed circuit board location.

Do not over tighten screw terminals, over tightening may damage threads, resulting in reduced terminal contact pressure and difficultwith screw terminal removal.

This system contains static-sensitive components. Always ground yourself with a proper wrist strap before handling any circuits so thatstatic charges are removed from the body. Use static suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies removed from the unit.

Follow the Instructions in the installation, operating, and programming manuals. These instructions must be followed to avoid damage tothe control panel and associated equipment. PEGAsys operation and reliability depend upon proper installation.

Fire Alarm System Limitations While installing a fire alarm system may make lower insurance rates possible, it is not a substitute for fire insurance!

An automatic fire alarm system - typically made up of smoke detectors, heat detectors, manual pull stations, audible warning devices,and a fire alarm control with remote notification-capability can provide early warning of a developing fire. Such a system, however, doesnot assure protection against property damage or loss of life resulting from a fire.

Any fire alarm system may fail for a variety of reasons:

Smoke detectors may not sense fire where smoke cannot reach the detectors such as in chimneys, in walls, or roofs, or on the other sideof closed doors. Smoke detectors also may not sense a fire on another level or floor of a building. A second floor detector, for example,may not sense a first floor or basement fire. Furthermore, all types of smoke detectors - both ionization and photoelectric types, havesensing limitations. No type of smoke detector can sense every kind of fire caused by carelessness and safety hazards like smoking inbed, violent explosions, escaping gas, improper storage of flammable materials, overloaded electrical circuits, children playing withmatches, or arson.

Audible warning devices such as bells may not alert people if these devices are located on the other side of closed or partly open doorsor are located on another floor of a building.

A fire alarm system will not operate without electrical power. If AC power fails, the system will operate from standby batteries only for aspecified time.

Rate-of-Rise heat detectors may be subject to reduced sensitivity over time. For this reason, the rate-of-rise feature of each detectorshould be tested at least once per year by a qualified fire protection specialist.

xi

Auxiliary Equipment used in the system may not be technically compatible with the control panel. It is essential to use only equipmentlisted for service with your control panel.

Telephone lines needed to transmit alarm signals from a premise to a central monitoring station may be out of service or temporarilydisabled.

The most common cause of fire alarm malfunctions, however, is inadequate maintenance. All devices and system wiring should betested and maintained by professional fire alarm installers following written procedures supplied with each device. System inspectionand testing should be scheduled monthly or as required by National and/or local fire codes. Adequate written records of all inspectionsshould be kept.

GENERAL SAFETY NOTICES The following must be observed to maintain personnel safety.

The following general safety notices supplement specific warnings and cautions appearing in the manual. The safety precautions in thissection must be understood and applied during operation and maintenance. This manual is to be used by trained distributors/technicians.The entire manual should be read and fully understood prior to installation.

TEST EQUIPMENT

Make certain test equipment is in good operating condition. Do not touch live equipment or personnel working on live equipment whileholding a test meter. Some types of measuring devices should not be grounded; these devices should not be held when taking measure-ments.

FIRST AID

Any injury, no matter how slight, should never go unattended. Always obtain first aid or medical attention immediately.

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS

The following general safety precautions are to be observed at all times:1. All electrical components associated with equipment shall be installed and grounded in accordance with NEC, NFPA and local

regulation requirements.2. Special precautionary measures are essential to prevent applying power to equipment at any time maintenance work is in progress.3. Before working on electrical equipment, use a voltmeter to ensure that system is not energized.4. When working near electricity, do not use metal rules, flashlights, metallic pencils, or any other objects having exposed conductive

material.5. When connecting a meter to terminals for measurement, use range higher than expected voltage.

1-1 August 1999

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

76-100016-001

CHAPTER 1GENERAL INFORMATION

1-1 INTRODUCTIONThis manual contains the operation, maintenance, troubleshoot-ing, parts listing, and installation information necessary to sup-port the PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control and Fire AlarmSystem.

NOTE: This manual is to be used by trained distributors only.The entire manual should be read and fully understoodprior to installation.

1-1.1 System DescriptionPEGAsys is a fire alarm/suppression control system which canbe used for local, auxiliary, remote protective signaling and re-leasing device service. The system is a microprocessor baseddesign for use with intelligent detectors and loop devices.

The system utilizes distributed intelligent field devices. Thesedevices are typically smoke detectors, contact input devicesrelay outputs and signal output modules which represent a singlefire alarm initiation/indicating zone. Each device contains its owndata transceiver, micro controller, 4k of memory and applicablealgorithms which allows each device to operate independent ofthe control system. These unique devices have the ability toanalyze information, make decisions and store information withinthemselves. They communicate with the PEGAsys system us-ing the BIP protocol which utilizes a two-wire (Style 4), four wire(Style 6) or isolated (Style 7) multiplex trunk. The PEGAsys cansupport up to 255 device addresses per loop with a maximumof 8 loops for a total of 2040 Intelligent device points per sys-tem.

The PEGAsys is capable of controlling a wide variety of auxil-iary devices, such as relays, audible visual indicating signaldevices and agent/sprinkler release systems. The system alsosupports the use of serial printers which provide hard copy ofsystem status information.

1-1.2 System ComponentsThe system is comprised of three major components as shownin Figure 1-1: the Central Control Panel (CCP) communicateswith the field devices and drives output devices such as alarmsignals that communicate with central stations and various typesof control equipment. A display panel located on the CCP pro-vides system status LEDs, Control Switches and a 80-charac-ter LCD for alphanumeric display of system status information.

The single-loop PEGAsys Central Control Panel (P/N 76-100000-501) consists of the Central Control Module (CCM) as-sembly, one receiver/transmitter (RX/TX) module and one powersupply assembly. Optionally the system can add a motherboardassembly which allow the installation of optional output mod-ules. An auxiliary power supply module can be added whichincreases the base system power supply capacity to 8.0 ampsat 24 VDC.

In multi-loop form the PEGAsys ML panel (P/N 76-100000-600)consists of a CCM, one power-supply assembly, one RX/TX mod-ule and one multi-loop motherboard mounted in the enclosure.The unique multi-loop motherboard provides the ability to connectup to eight RX/TX modules to the system allowing a full 2040 ad-dressable points to be connected to the PEGAsys ML system.

Auxiliary enclosures are available to allow the system to be ex-panded. The auxiliary enclosure has the same dimensions as thatof the main enclosure with the absence of the window in the door.There are optional back planes which install in the expansion en-closure. This allows the number of I/O modules and system powersupplies to be expanded. To allow for maximum system flexibilityexpansion enclosure(s) and backplane(s) can be added to thesystem. Refer to Appendix B for further system expansion de-tails.

1-2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONThe following paragraphs give a brief description of each com-ponents used in the PEGAsys system. For functional descrip-tions of each component see Chapter 3 of this manual.

1-2.1 Central Control Module (CCM)The CCM assembly is the heart of the system and is comprisedof two PCB assemblies, the display module and the main pro-cessor module. The CCM controls the operation and supervi-sion of all the system modules and software within the PEGAsyssystem. It receives loop device data from the RX/TX module,processes the data based on pre-programmed instructions andtransmits output commands to the output modules, field devices,and display module(s).

1-2.2 Display ModuleThe display module assembly, attached to the main processorPCB, provides the system with the operator interface for controlswitches, system status LEDs, system trouble/alarm buzzer, a80-character (2 x 40) LCD display and an integral numeric key-pad. The keypad is used for entering the security password andnavigating through the user menus. The system buzzer pro-vides two distinctly different signaling patterns for audible warn-ing of system alarms and troubles.

1-2August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

Display Reset Switch

Figure 1-2. Central Control Module (CCM)

System Status

ALARM

GROUND FAULT

POWER ON

PREALARM

TROUBLE

CPU ERROR

SUPERVISORY

SILENCE

SILENCEACKLDGE RESET

SCROLL DRILL

2

DRILL

1 43 5

6 7 8 9 0

Figure 1-3. Display Module Assembly

1-2.3 Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX)The RX/TX functions as the hardware & software interface be-tween the field devices and the CCM. The RX/TX receives con-trol requests from the CCM and establishes communicationswith the field devices. The RX/TX receives status changes fromthe field devices and reports these changes to the CCM. TheRX/TX shown in Figure 1-4 is capable of communicating withup to 255 intelligent devices and complies with the wiring re-quirements of NFPA Style 4, 6 & 7 (with the use of the loopisolator device). Style 4 initiation circuit wiring will permit Ttapping, or branch circuitry.

1-2.4 Power Supply/Charger AssemblyThe power supply/charger assembly (P/N 76-100009-010) iscomprised of a printed circuit board (PCB) assembly and a AC/DC switching power supply unit. The switching power supplyunit provides 4 amps of 24 VDC from the 120/240 VAC inputpower. The PCB assembly is a microprocessor based unit whichprovides the system with:

Battery charging and supervision AC power supervision 24 VDC supervision Battery load test 24 VDC ground fault detection (+/-) Auxiliary 24 VDC outputs

Loop Isolatorfor Style 7

Figure 1-4. Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX)

Figure 1-5. Power Supply/Charger Assembly

1-2.5 Basic MotherboardThe basic I/O motherboard assembly (P/N 76-100007-001) isan assembly which can accept up to 8 I/O module circuit boardassemblies. The motherboard is mounted to the back of thesystem enclosure and /or the auxiliary enclosures. It distributesthe system 24 VDC power and I/O bus communications to the I/O modules. The I/O bus communications are provided by a RJ-12 (flat phone cable) style connection. The 24 VDC is providedby the system power supply via a 2-conductor wiring harness.

1-3 August 1999

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

76-100016-001

The I/O motherboard mounts to standoffs on the back of the mainand expansion enclosures with screws provided.

Figure 1-6. Basic I/O Motherboard

1-2.6 Multi-Loop MotherboardThe multi-loop I/O motherboard assembly (P/N 76-100017-001)is an assembly which can accept up to 8 RX/TX modules andprovide connections for up to 7 I/O module circuit board as-semblies. The ML motherboard is mounted to standoffs on theback of the main system enclosure. It distributes system 24VDC power, CCM-RX/TX communications for up to 8 RX/TXmodules and I/O bus communications to the I/O modules. TheI/O bus communications are provided by a RJ-12 (flat phonecable) style connection. A single RJ-12 connection connectsthe ML motherboard to the CCM for RX/TX communications.The 24 VDC is provided by the system power supply via a 2-conductor wiring harness.

Figure 1-7. Multi-Loop I/O Motherboard

1-2.7 Input/Output ModulesThe optional input/output modules allow the PEGAsys systemto interface with external auxiliary devices. These auxiliary de-vices can be audible/visual signal devices, HVAC systems, el-evator recall, power shut down, remote annunciators, agent/sprinkler release system and any other control type input oroutput which may need to be interfaced to the system.

The input and output modules plug into the motherboard as-sembly located on the back plate of the system enclosure. EachI/O module occupies one slot in the motherboard assembly whichhas 8 slots available. The I/O modules and the CCM communi-cate over the RS-485 based I/O bus, which uses a 6-conductorphone type cable to connect the CCM to the motherboard.

The PEGAsys single-loop panel has the ability to support amaximum of 16 I/O modules, in any combination. However, nomore than 8 of any one type of module can be used. If using aCity-Tie module, the limit is one per system.

The PEGAsys multi-Loop panel has the ability to support a maxi-mum of 23 I/O modules, in any combination, on the system.However, no more than 8 of any one type module can be used.If using a City-Tie module, the limit is one per system.

The following paragraphs describe each available I/O modulein greater detail.

1-2.7.1 SIGNAL OUTPUT MODULE

The PEGAsys panel has the capacity for a maximum of (8) AlarmSounder/Signal Output cards, thus providing 32 possible sig-nal circuits. Each Alarm Sounder/Signal Output card, Figure 1-8, is equipped with supervised 24 VDC outputs which canoperate as Style Y or Style Z indicating circuits.

76

-10

00

03

-00

1

Figure 1-8. Signal Output Module

1-2.7.2 RELAY OUTPUT MODULE

The PEGAsys panel has the capacity for a maximum of 8 Aux-iliary Relay Output cards, allowing up to 32 relays. Each Auxil-iary Relay Output card is equipped with four (4), Form C,dry-contact relay outputs. The ability to isolate an individual relayoutput is provided through the system operator menu.

1-4August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

Figure 1-9. Relay Output Module

1-2.7.3 AGENT RELEASE OUTPUT MODULE

The PEGAsys panel has the capacity for a maximum of 8 agentrelease output modules, providing up to 8 release circuits and24 maximum signal outputs on those modules.

Figure 1-10. Agent Release Output Module

1-2.7.4 CITY-TIE MODULE

The City-Tie (Notification) Module will provide connection andoperation for local energy, shunt type master box and reversepolarity styles of output.

76-1

00002-0

01

Figure 1-11. City Tie Module

1-2.8 Standby BatteriesSpace is provided within the central control panel enclosure forup to two (2) 12-V, 17 Amp Hour, sealed lead-acid batteriesused for 24, 60 or 90 hour standby operation. If additional bat-teries are required, an optional battery enclosure is available.The enclosure (Figure 1-12) is a heavy duty steel cabinet whichcan house up to two 40AH batteries. For installation informa-tion see Paragraph 7-9.1.

STANDBY BATTERIES

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

KIDDE

Figure 1-12. Battery Enclosure

1-2.9 Intelligent Loop DevicesThe SmartOneTM Series of Intelligent Fire Alarm devices pro-vide the PEGAsys control system with smoke and heat detec-tion and necessary monitoring and control functions requiredby todays advanced fire alarm systems. The following para-graphs describe each available intelligent detection device.

Figure 1-13. SmartOne Detection Device

1-2.9.1 SmartOne IONIZATION DETECTORS

The SmartOne Ionization smoke detectors provide true distrib-uted-intelligence, addressable microprocessor-based smokedetection to the PEGAsys system.

1-5 August 1999

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

76-100016-001

1-2.9.2 SmartOne PHOTOELECTRIC DETECTORS

The SmartOne Photoelectric smoke detectors provide true dis-tributed-intelligence, addressable microprocessor-based smokedetection to the PEGAsys system.

1-2.9.3 SmartOne HEAT DETECTORS

The SmartOne Thermistor heat detectors provide true distrib-uted-intelligence, addressable, microprocessor-based heat de-tection to the PEGAsys system.

1-2.10 SmartOne Detector BasesThe SmartOne series of detection devices all use universalmounting bases which are available in three styles. The 4SB isa European-Style 4-inch base whose outside diameter matchesthat of the low profile SmartOne detectors, which when com-bined, provides a very attractive unit. The 4SB, shown in Figure1-14, mounts to standard 3, 3.5-inch, or 100-mm electrical boxeswith ease.

Figure 1-14. Four-inch Detector Base

The 6SB model, shown above, is a traditional style detectorbase with an integral trim ring which provides coverage for anyinconsistencies between the electrical box and ceiling material.The 6SB mounts to standard 3, 3.5 and 4 inch electrical boxeswith ease.

Figure 1-15. 6-inch Detector Base

1-2.11 Addressable Contact Input DevicesThe SmartOne Contact Monitor (P/N 70-407008-00X) allowsan installer the ability to interface typical NO/NC fire alarm de-vices, such as water flow and tamper switches to the PEGAsyssystem. The contact monitor is also used to interface to themanual alarm, manual release and abort stations.

Figure 1-16. Addressable Contact Input Device

1-2.12 Addressable Relay Output DevicesThe addressable relay output device (P/N 70-408004-001) pro-vides the PEGAsys system with a Form-C dry-contact interfacefor remote control applications.

Figure 1-17. Addressable Relay Output Device

1-2.13 Model DH-2000 Air Duct HousingThe DH-2000 air duct housing is designed for detecting par-ticles of combustion products in air-handling systems.

Figure 1-18. Air Duct Housing

1-6August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

Table 1-1. System Specifications

! "#$ %#"#$ %#

& ! "#'%('

&)*+% *, "#-%('

"& .# +/*"# %('

&*)! "#%('

&"* "#%('

)*/*%0* %(-1#

)*0*23 %(-1#

)* .* %('

)* %( $

/*/**%4 .* 5

/*""4 .* "+&

2*""# .*"/6(

737

&"* %('1"#

&*)! +/*%('1"#

03&"*)"*82**%

"""""9"*

"&*)!0":;:0"'%('1"#:<:

+/*

)*/*%"/*%%5'%(-1"#

%#1#

/*%+!%('1"#

6""

&0)=*/4%('1 .*#

4%

0"6!0)=*/4 #

*40)=*/4%3.,"*

*/0 "#

*Refer to Appendix A for total system power and AC branchcircuit requirements.

1-2.14 Loop Isolator DevicesThe SmartOne series of loop devices, shown in Figures 1-19through 1-21, offer optional loop isolation which protects theloop from wire to wire short conditions (NFPA Style 7.0).

Figure 1-19. Loop Isolator, Stand-Alone

LO

OP

ISO

LA

TO

R

RX

/TX

KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.

ASHLAND, MA 01721

SHORT-1SHORT-2

DS2 DS1

J1

FOR MODULE INSTALL.

P/N 76-100016-001

INSTALLATION MANUAL

REFER TO

PROCEDURES

Laboratories Inc.Underwriters

R

LISTED

R

Figure 1-20. Loop Isolator, RX/TX Mount

Figure 1-21. Loop Isolator, 6" Detector Base Mount

1-3 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONSystem power specifications are outlined in Table 1-1.

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

August 199976-100016-001 2-1

CHAPTER 2OPERATION

2-1 INTRODUCTIONThis chapter describes the PEGAsys system controls and in-dicators located on the display panel. It also describes theoperating procedures and menu system.

2-2.1 Modes of OperationThere are two modes of PEGAsys system operation: In the default operation the panel will be set to latch all

alarm inputs on the system. The latching operation will notallow the loop input devices to generate an "alarm off" sig-nal that would possibly interrupt a discharge time delaysequence. To return the panel to normal the "RESET" but-ton will need to be pushed.

The second mode of operation is non-latching. This optioncan be enabled, using the PCS (PEGAsys ConfigurationSoftware) to define if a loop device input is to be non-latch-ing. The non-latching operation will allow the loop inputdevices to generate an "Alarm Off" signal to the panel. Whenthis signal is received the panel would interrupt the dis-charge time delay sequence of operation. However, all out-puts that had been activated previous to the "Alarm Off"signal will remain on and latched until the panel is reset.

The advantage of offering a latching or non-latching operationper loop input device, allows the installer/designer to custom-ize the system. This allows the inter mixing of latching and non-latching devices to protect critical areas where both type maybe specified

Figure 2-1. System Front Panel

When an Alarm returns to a normal state (Alarm Off), the buzzerwill sound in a pulsed fashion, the alarm off condition must beacknowledged to silence the buzzer. During the Trouble Offcondition, the audible device provides no sound. The followingsummarizes the buzzer operation: Alarm condition is indicated by a continuous ON signal, Alarm OFF is indicated by a ½ second ON ½ second OFF

signal, Trouble condition is indicated by a 1 second ON and 1 sec-

ond OFF continuous beeping,Every individual change of status must be individually acknowl-edged by pressing the ACKLDGE (acknowledge) pushbuttonto silence the Audible device.

2-2 CONTROLS AND INDICATORSThe control and indicators of the PEGAsys system are locatedon the display panel, shown in Figure 2-1. The display panel ismounted on top of the CCM. To gain access to the CCM, thepanel door must be open. Table 2-1 lists controls and indicatorsfor the display unit, giving name and functional description.

2-2.1 LCD DisplayThe display panel contains an 80-character (2X40) alphanu-meric display. This LCD display is used to present system sta-tus. In the procedure section of this chapter there will be several

System Status

ALARM

GROUND FAULT

POWER ON

PREALARM

TROUBLE

CPU ERROR

SUPERVISORY

SILENCE

SILENCEACKLDGE RESET

SCROLL DRILL

2

DRILL

1 43 5

6 7 8 9 0

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

August 1999 76-100016-0012-2

simulated LCD display readouts. The LCD display readoutswill be used to aid users in the operation of the system.

2-2.2 Audible DeviceThe Display Panel also contains an audible device which gen-erates two separate audible tones, one for alarms and one fortroubles. This device sounds continuously when a new alarmcondition is received until the condition is acknowledged. It alsosounds intermittently when a trouble, supervisory, or pre-alarmcondition is received until the condition is acknowledged.

2-2.3 Control and Indicator DescriptionRefer to Table 2-1 for complete description of controls and indi-cators.

2-3 SYSTEM SECURITYThe PEGAsys system provides three distinct levels of programprotection, as required by UL Standard 864. The user can onlyaccess the system by entering a valid password. Typical validpasswords consist of three or four characters but may be up toeight characters in length.

2-3.1 Levels of SecurityThe three security levels are: Level One, Level Two, and Sys-tem Manufacturer. The highest security level is reserved for thesystem manufacturer. System owner is level one, system in-staller is level two. Passwords consist of numeric characters (0- 9) which allows access from the integral keypad of the CCM.Alphanumeric characters can only be used with the PCS pro-gram and if used they will lock out any possible entry using theCCM keypad to gain entrance to the menus.

If alphanumeric passwords are necessary for a particular appli-cation, it is recommended that the Level One password be nu-meric and the Level Two password be alphanumeric so as toallow the user to retrieve system information (system informa-tion lists) and also prevent a user from changing any pro-grammed system parameters.

2-3.2 Default PasswordsThe PEGAsys system provides protection from unauthorizedentry to the system menus by utilizing two levels of default pass-words, level one and level two. This feature provides two sepa-rate passwords which increases the security of the system.Default passwords are set when the system is shipped fromKidde. These default passwords are:

Level One = 987

Level Two = 1865

These default passwords are valid until other passwords areprogrammed into the system.

2-3.3 Entering PasswordsThe password entry procedure is listed below:a. Verify that the system status is displayed.b. Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:

PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD

c. Type in three or four digit password into keypad. Ensure apound sign (#) appears for each key pressed.

NOTE: Use the default password, if a new password has notbeen set.

d. Press the return (↵↵↵↵↵ ) key. Verify that the display reads:

1:ISOLATE 2:LIST3:SET 4:TEST

2-4 SYSTEM POWER-UPThe following step-by-step procedure is for initial power-up ofthe CCP.a. Perform the installation check-out procedure in Chapter 7

of this manual.b. Set the circuit breaker for the CCP power to ON. Verify that

the display reads "Main Processor Power On" and that theCPU ERROR indicator is lit. Ensure that the audible deviceis buzzing continuously.

c. Press the display module reset switch. Verify that the CPUERROR indicator is extinguished and the audible device issilenced.

d. Verify that the display reads as follows:

MAIN PROCESSORPOWER ON

e. After ten seconds, verify that the display reads as follows:

RXTX NON-MONITORING TROUBLE ONRXTX1

NOTE: For multi-loop systems only. The above and below RX/TX messages will repeat themselves for each RX/TXmodule installed in the system. The above messagewill be displayed while the system is initializing itself.This initialization can take up to 90 seconds.

To clear the below RX/TX message use the AutoLearnfunction from the menu function or upload theconfiguration from the PCS program. If using PCSsoftware, verify that the correct number of RX/TX loopsare enabled in the Loops Topic of the configuration fileprior to uploading.

RX/TX 1 NOT REGISTERED ONRX/TX LOOP 1

f. Verify that the POWER ON and TROUBLE indicators arelit.

g. Connect the backup batteries to the CCP in accordance tothe procedure in Chapter 7.

h. Press the ACKLDGE pushbutton. After approximately oneminute the display will momentarily read :

RXTX NON-MONITORING TROUBLE OFFi. Verify the display reads the incorrect time and date.j. Set time and date as follows:

(1) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD(2) Type in the default 1st level password (987).(3) Press the return (↵ ) key. Verify that the display reads:

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

August 199976-100016-001 2-3

Table 2-1. Control and Indicators

DEL NOITCNUF

NOREWOPnehW.rewoptupniCAgniviecersimetsysehttahtsetacidni,detanimullinehWehtdna)noitidnocelbuort(derruccosaheruliafrewoptupniCAnasetacidni,ffo

.noitidnocybdnatsyrettabaotdehctiwssahmetsys

MRALAtupninaybdetroperneebsahnoitidnocmralanasetacidni,detanimullinehW

.ecived

ELBUORT .metsysehtnistsixenoitidnocelbuortasetacidni,detanimullinehW

YROSIVREPUSaybdetroperneebsahnoitidnocyrosivrepusasetacidni,detanimullinehW

.tupniyrosivrepusrofdemmargorpecivedtupni-metsys

TLUAFDNUORGenilCDV42ehtnodetcetedneebsahtluafdnuorgasetacidni,detanimullinehW

.-/+rehtieyalpsidlliwDCLehT.rotinomylppusrewopehtyb

MRALA-ERPekomsfoleveladesnessahrotcetedtaehroekomsasetacidni,detanimullinehW

.tnioptesmrala-erpehtsdeecxehcihwtaehro

RORREUPCotstluafedmetsysehT.deliafsaherawtfosMCCsetacidni,detanimullinehW

.sutatslangiSlareneG/mralAenoZ

ECNELIS .decnelisneebevahstuptuoelbiduA/langiSehtsetacidni,detanimullinehW

HCTIWS NOITCNUF

EGDELWONKCA

-nonroftessiecivedtupnifiFFOmralA(NOmralAnaretfadesserpnehWsecnelisti,deruccosahnoitidnocNOmrala-erpro,yrosivrepus,elbuorT)gnihctal

ro,"YROSIVREPUS","ELBUORT","MRALA"ehT.rezzubelbiduas'lenapehtsahnoitidnocehttahtetacidniotydaetsswolgrotacidniDEL"MRALA-ERP"

ehtdnuoserotlenapehtesuaclliwsnoitidnoctneuqesbuS.degdelwonkcaneeb.ecneuqesevoba

ECNELIS

langismetsysehtsecnelisti,mralAtnerrucgnigdelwonkcaretfadesserpnehWrotacidni"ECNELIS"ehT.elbaecnelissademmargorpneebevahhcihwstuptuo

ehtgnisserP.decnelisneebevahstuptuolangisehttahtetacidniotsetanimulli.sutatstuptuOyaleRehttceffetonseodhctiws"ECNELIS"

TESER

eht,deraelcdnadegdelwonkcaneebevahsmralaevitcallaretfadesserpnehW:metsys

srotcetederiw4rewopotdesustuptuoCDV42yrailixuasteseR.snoitidnocmraladehctalllasteseR

.etatslamronriehtotsyalerllasnruteR.yalpsidlausivehtno"teseRmetsyS"syalpsiD

.ffosrotacidni"MRALAENOZ"dna"MRALA"ehtsnruT

LLORCS

esuaclliw,noitidnocyrosivrepusro,elbuort,mralaevitcanagniruddesserpnehWtonlliwnoitidnocmralAehT.)s(reffubtneveevitcaehthguorhtllorcsotDCLeht

wollatonlliwnoitidnocyrosivrepuS.deweivebotselbuortroyrosivrepuswolla.deweivebotreffubselbuorteht

LLIRDlangisllaetavitcalliwmetsyseht,sdnocesevifrofdlehdnadesserpnehW

.noitavitcallirdrofdemmargorpneebevahhcihwstuptuo

)0-1(DAPYEKCIREMUN .metsysunemehtotninoitamrofnimetsysdnadrowssapretneotesU

ECAPSKCAB .seirtnegnorwtcerrocotdnametsysunemehttixeotesU

NRUTER .metsysunemehtgnisunehwyekretnEehtsadesU

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

August 1999 76-100016-0012-4

1:ISOLATE 2:LIST3:SET 4:TEST(4) Type in 3111 on the keypad. Verify that the display

reads:SYSTEM TIME (AM/PM)ENTER THE TIME _ _ : _ _ (HH:MM)(5) Type in the time (HH=hours 0-12 and then MM=minutes

0-59). Press the return key. Verify that the display reads:SYSTEM TIME (AM/PM)1:AM 2:PM(6) Type in appropriate selection (1 for AM or 2 for PM).

NOTE: If there has been a mistake in the entered data, pressthe backspace key as many times as required to get tothe mistake, then re-enter data from that point.

k. The power-up procedure is complete at this point. The sys-tem is now ready for loop device registration and program-ming which is covered in this chapter.

2-5 SYSTEM MENUSPEGAsys has a built-in menu structure. This menu structurehas been implemented to aid users with system operating func-tions. The following paragraphs describe the menu structure,accessing the menu, exiting the menu and menu functions. Fig-ure 2-2 shows the system's Level One menu structure. Figure2-3 shows the system's Level Two menu structure.

2-5.1 Menu StructureThe PEGAsys menu structure consists of a main menu, andmultiple sub-level menus. The sub-level menus may also con-tain multiple sub-level menus. The main menu displays afteryou enter a valid password. You can also access the Top Levelmenu from any sub-level menu at almost anytime by pressingthe backspace key located on the keypad.

NOTE: The top level menu may not be available by using thebackspace key while certain types of programming arebeing performed.

It is possible to access a previous higher level menu from alower level menu by pressing the backspace key.

The choices of available sub menus after a valid password hasbeen entered, correspond to the security level password thathas been entered.

The main menu for the 1st level, 2nd level, and Manufacturersecurity level is:

1:ISOLATE 2:LIST3:SET 4:TEST

Any one of the basic functions listed in a main menu can beselected by pressing the numeric key of the systems keypadwhich corresponds to the desired function. (Example: To selectthe LIST function from the main menu, press the 2 key on thesystem keypad.) You also select lower level functions from sub-level menus using the numeric keys.

2-5.2 Accessing the System MenusPerform the steps in Paragraph 2-3.3.

2-5.3 Exiting the System MenusTo exit the system's menus, perform the following steps:a. Press the backspace key as many times necessary to reach

the top level menu, shown in the top of the next column:

1:ISOLATE 2:LIST3:SET 4:TEST

b. Press the backspace key. Verify that the system returns tostandby. The display should read:

SYSTEM STATUS NORMAL HH:MM MM-DD YR40 CHARACTER CUSTOM MESSAGE

NOTE: When exiting the system menus, if the system is normalthe display panel should show the time and date asshown in the above step.

2-5.4 Menu FunctionsTables 2-2 through 2-5 list and provide a brief description of allfunctions that you can perform using the PEGAsys systemsmenus. In addition, the tables provide the security access leveland a keystroke formula for each function. The keystroke for-mula is a sequence of numbers you enter via the systems key-pad to access a particular function. These formulas provide thepath from the main menu to the desired function. Formulas areprovided for each access level. After you enter the formula, someof the functions require you to press the return key to start imple-menting the function.

Most functions will require that you enter additional data to imple-ment the function, such as a device address or desired alarmthreshold.

2-5.4.1 ISOLATE MENU FUNCTION

The isolate menu function (Table 2-2) permits the operator toisolate field devices and output modules. Isolating any deviceimmediately places the system in a trouble condition, and ini-tiates an audible trouble alarm and a printout with the time, date,and device isolated. The feature is typically used to temporarilyisolate auxiliary devices during a system test.

2-5.4.2 LIST MENU FUNCTION

The list menu function (Table 2-3) permits the operator to listvarious system parameters. All lists are real time actual systemconditions which are displayed and printed with the time anddate.

2-5.4.3 SET MENU FUNCTION

The set menu function permits the operator to program varioussystem parameters within the system. A few examples are shownin Table 2-4.

2-5.4.4 TEST MENU FUNCTION

The test menu function, shown in Table 2-5, allows the operatorto test individual or a group of field devices. On command, adetector or contact input device can be tested, and results willbe printed and displayed at the Central Control Panel. The Testprocedure in the device is activated by imposing a signal withinthe device that will cause an alarm output. The Control Panelverifies that an alarm output is generated and reports TestResult OK for each device.

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

August 199976-100016-001 2-5

2-6 MODES OF OPERATIONThe PEGAsys system has four modes of operation. Each modehas different indications and action required. The following Para-graphs describe each mode, indications and action if required.

2-6.1 Normal Standby ModeThis is the typical mode of the system. In this mode, no alarm,trouble, or supervisory conditions exist in the system. The sys-tem display will show the time, day of the week, and date. Forexample:

SYSTEM STATUS NORMAL 11:06 AM_05-04-9040_CHARACTER_CUSTOM_MESSAGE

The system provides an option which allows the System StatusNormal message to be replaced with a display of battery charg-ing voltage and current for the system standby batteries. Forexample:

PS01_26.0 V_0.10_A_ _ _ _ _11:06 AM_05-04-9040_CHARACTER_CUSTOM_MESSAGE

The green AC POWER LED will be illuminated to indicate thatthe systems main power source is normal.

NOTE: In the Normal Standby Operation state, it is possiblefor the 80-character display to show data other thanthe time, day of date. This occurs when the systemmenus are being accessed either locally or remotelythrough one of its serial ports. This condition will beindicated by the menu selections being displayed onthe display panel being illuminated.

In the Normal Standby Mode, no indicating LEDs will be illumi-nated other than the AC POWER.

2-6.2 Active Alarm ModeThe system enters an alarm mode if a device (or devices) hasdetected an alarm condition, such as smoke / heat above thealarm threshold level. There are two types of alarms which canoccur:

Device Alarm

An alarm in which a device has communicated the alarm statusproperly to the Central Control Panel, by providing the alarmeddevice address for indication to the operator.

Zone Alarm

An alarm condition detected by one or several devices, but whichcannot be reported by a specific device due to a malfunction incommunications between the system and the alarmed device(s).This is a redundant feature to increase system reliability and iscalled Failsoft Mode.

NOTE: A device can signal a zone alarm to the system duringsome communication failures.

2-6.2.1 ALARM MODE INDICATIONS

The following indicates the system is in its alarm mode of op-eration.a. The red ALARM LED will be illuminated and there will be

a continuous audible signal by the system buzzer at thepanel.

b. The 80-character display will cycle between all currentlyactive alarms. Example:

NOTE: If the alarm is a zone alarm, the Device Address 1000- 8000 will be displayed depending on which RX/TXmodule detects the zone alarm.

b. The outputs which have been previously programmed foractivation upon alarm by the specific devices will be turnedon. (Example: Signal audible signaling devices, control re-lays for HVAC shutdown or elevator recall.)

2-6.2.2 ALARM MODE USER ACTION

The following steps should be performed when the system isset into alarm.a. Press the display panels ACKLDGE pushbutton to acknowl-

edge the displayed alarm condition. The 80-character dis-play will continue to cycle between any remaining alarmswhich have not been acknowledged. The ACKNOWL-EDGE switch must be operated once for each alarm re-ceived at the panel.

b. Once all current alarms have been acknowledged, the alarmindicating circuits (audible devices) can be silenced by op-erating the SILENCE switch.

c. After all of the current alarms have been acknowledged,verify that the display reads: XXX ALARMS REMAIN. TheXXX representing the total of all active alarms. All activealarms can be viewed on the display by pressing the scrollpushbutton.

NOTE: The first 64 alarms will only be displayed. Subsequentalarms over the initial 64 will not be displayed, evenwhen any or all of the first 64 alarms clear. However,all alarms regardless of total will be processed in theEOC. For a complete list of active alarms access theevent buffer menu using the CCM keypad.

d. Any subsequent alarms will cause the alarm audible cir-cuits to resound. Each additional alarm must be acknowl-edged before the alarm indicating circuits can be silenced.

e. When a device goes out of alarm, the display will indicatethe device address and an alarm off (AOF) message (non-latching mode). Example:

1080 AOF_ _ _ _PHOTOELECTRIC DETECTOR40_CHARACTER_LOCATION_MESSAGE

NOTE: If the alarm is a zone alarm, the address 1000-8000will be displayed, indicating that active device(s) infailsoft mode in the zone have gone out of alarm.

f. Each device which goes out of alarm must be acknowl-edged with the ACKLDGE pushbutton (non-latching).

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

August 1999 76-100016-0012-6

Figure 2-2. Level One Menu Structure

Please Enter Password

1:ISOLATE

1:LoopDevices

2:SignalOutputs

3:RelayOutputs

4:Release Outputs

5:CityTieOutput

6:Digital I/O

2:LIST

1:IsolatedDevices/Outputs

2:EventBuffer

3:Detector Level

4:Active Events

5:Programming

6:Assignments

3:SET

1:Time - Date

2:PrinterControl

4:TEST

1:Lamp Test

2:Loop Device(Alarm Test)

3:Battery Test

7:Voltages

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

August 199976-100016-001 2-7

Figure 2-3. Level Two Menu Structure

Please Enter Password

1:ISOLATE

1:Loop Devices

2:Signal Outputs

3:Relay Outputs

4:Release Outputs

5:CityTieOutput

6:GlobalI/O6:Digital I/O

2:LIST

1:Isolated Devices/Outputs

2:EventBuffer

3:DetectorLevel

4:Active Events

5:Programming

6:Assignments

3:SET

1:Time - Date

2:Printer

3:Devices

4:Programming

4:TEST

1:Lamp Test

2:LoopDevice(Alarm Test)

3:BatteryTest

4:WalkTest

5:Alarm Simulation Test

6:GlobalI/O7:Global 7:Voltages

5:Unused

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

August 1999 76-100016-0012-8

Table 2-2. Isolate Menu Function

NOTE: 1 = LEVEL ONE, 2 = LEVEL TWO, M = MANUFACTURER LEVEL

noitcnuF noitpircseD alumroFsseccAleveL

eciveDpooLetalosI sserddaybUCRnaetalosi-eD/etalosI 1-1 M/2/1

tuptuOlangiSeludoMO/IetalosI sserddaybtiucrictuptuoeludomlangisaetalosi-eD/etalosI 1-2-1 M/2/1

tuptuOlangiSesaeleReludoMO/IetalosI .sserddaybtuptuolangiseludomesaeleraetalosi-eD/etalosI 2-2-1 M/2/1

tuptuOlangiSMCCetalosI tuptuolangisMCCAetalosi-eD/etalosI 3-2-1 M/2/1

tuptuOyaleReludoMO/IetalosI sserddaybtuptuoyalereludomO/Iaetalosi-eD/etalosI 1-3-1 M/2/1

tuptuOyaleRMCCetalosI tuptuoyalerMCCetalosi-eD/etalosI 2-3-1 M/2/1

tuptuOesaeleReludoMO/IetalosI sserddatuptuoybtuptuoesaelertneganaetalosi-eD/etalosI 1-4-1 M/2/1

tuptuOesaeleRtnegAMCCetalosItuptuoMCCybtuptuoesaelertneganaetalosi-eD/etalosI

sserdda2-4-1 M/2/1

tuptuOeiTytiCetalosI sserddatuptuoybeludomeityticetalosi-eD/etalosI 5-1 M/2/1

tuptuO/tupnIlatigiDetalosI sserddaO/Iybtuptuo/tupnilatigidetalosi-eD/etalosI 6-1 M/2/1

stupnIetalosIlabolG seludomO/I;secivedpooltupnimetsysllaetalosi-eD/etalosI 1-7-1 M/2

stuptuOetalosIlabolG seludomO/Ituptuometsysllaetalosi-eD/etalosI 2-7-1 M/2

NOTE: 1 = LEVEL ONE, 2 = LEVEL TWO, M = MANUFACTURER LEVEL

Table 2-3. List Menu Function

noitcnuF noitpircseD alumroFsseccAleveL

seciveDpooLdetalosItsiL detalosierahcihwseciveDpooLllatsiL 1-1-1-2 M/2/1

seludoMO/IdetalosItsiL detalosierahcihwseludomO/IllatsiL 1-2-1-2 M/2/1

stuptuoMCCdetalosItsiL detalosierahcihwstuptuoMCCllatsiL 2-2-1-2 M/2/1

llA(reffuByrotsiHtnevEtsiL)stnevE

reffubmorfseirtneyrotsihtnevededrocerllastsiL 1-2-2 M/2/1

yrotsiHtnevEtsiL)stnevEfoegnaR(reffuB

ybseirtneyrotsihtnevefoegnarelbatcelesresuastsiLetad

2-2-2 M/2/1

rotceteDelgniSatsiL leveltaeh/ekomsemitlaers’rotceteddetcelesasyalpsiD 1-3-2 M/2/1

leveLrotceteDtsiLstnioptesmraladnamrala-erpsrotcetedmetsysllastsiL

.leveltneserpdna2-3-2 M/2/1

)s(mralAevitcAtsiL .)s(mralametsysevitcallatsiL 1-4-2 M/2/1

yrosivrepuSevitcAtsiLsnoitidnoC

.snoitidnocyrosivrepusmetsysevitcallatsiL 2-4-2 M/2/1

noitidnoCelbuorTevitcAtsiL snoitidnocelbuortmetsysevitcallatsiL 3-4-2 M/2/1

margorPCOEtsiL senilmargorpCOEtsiL 1-5-2 M/2/1

margorPCTRtsiL senilmargorpCTRtsiL 2-5-2 M/2/1

sesserddAeciveDpooLtsiL metsysehtotnideretsigersecivedpoolllatsiL 1-6-2 M/2/1

sesserddAeludoMO/ItsiL metsysehtotnideretsigerseludomO/IllatsiL 2-6-2 M/2/1

sleveLegatloVeniLCPtsiL ecivedpooldeificepshcaetaslevelegatlovenilCPstsiL 1-7-2 M/2/1

CDV9eciveDpooLtsiLlevelylppusrewop

levelylppusrewoptlov9ecivedpooldeificepsstsiL 2-7-2 M/2/1

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

August 199976-100016-001 2-9

noitcnuF noitpircseD alumroFsseccAleveL

emiTmetsySteS emitmetsystesotresuswollA 1-1-3 M/2/1

etaDmetsySteS etadmetsystesotresuswollA 2-1-3 M/2/1

)I+V(yrettaBfoyalpsiDteSdnaegatlovgnigrahcyrettabfoyalpsidtesotresuwollA

.tnerruc3-1-3 M/2/1

retnirPlanretnIteS noitcennocretnirplanretniroftropelbanE 1-1-2-3 M/2/1

retnirPlanretnIelbasiD noitcennocretnirplanretniroftropelbasiD 2-1-2-3 M/2/1

retnirPlanretxEteS noitcennocretnirplanretxeroftropelbanE 1-2-2-3 M/2/1

retnirPlanretxEelbasiD noitcennocretnirplanretxeroftropelbasiD 2-2-2-3 M/2/1

sserddAeciveDteS .sserddaecivedegnahcotresuswollA 1-3-3 M/2

rotceteDnoitazinoIteSytivitisneS

mraladnamralaerProtcetednoitazinoItsujdaotresuswollAsgnittes

1-2-3-3 M/2

rotceteDcirtceleotohPteSytivitisneS

mraladnamralaerProtcetedcirtceleotohPtsujdaotresuswollAsgnittes

2-2-3-3 M/2

rotceteDlamrehTteSytivitisneS

mraladnamralaerProtcetedlamrehTtsujdaotresuswollAsgnittes

3-2-3-3 M/2

seciveDretsigeR noitarugifnocmetsysotnisecivedpoolretsigerotresuswollA 3-3-3 M/2

seciveDretsigeR-eDmetsysmorfsecivedpoolretsiger-edotresuswollA

.snoitarugifnoc4-3-3 M/2

lortnoCknilB gniknilbDELrotcetedelbasidotresuswollA 5-3-3 M/2

edoMthgiN/yaDteS .noitcnufyadrofrotcetedelbaneotresuswollA 1-1-4-3 M/2

sdoirePthgiN/yaDteS sdoirepthgiN/yaDtesotresuswollA 2-1-4-3 M/2

edoMyaDetavitcA edomyaDetavitcaotresuswollA 3-1-4-3 M/2

drowssaPlevelts1teS drowssaplevelts1tesotresuswollA 1-2-4-3 M/2

drowssaPleveldn2teS .drowssapleveldn2tesotresuswollA 2-2-4-3 M/2

margorPCTRelbanE noitcnufotenilmargorpCTRelbaneotresuswollA 1-3-4-3 M/2

margorPCTRelbasiD .gninoitcnufmorfenilmargorpCTRelbasidotresuswollA 2-3-4-3 M/2

edoMnraeLotuAteS noitcnuFnraeLotuAehtetavitcaotresuswollA 4-4-3 M/2

noitacifireVmralAteSdoirepemitdnanoitcnufnoitacifirevmralaehttesotresuswollA

.srotcetedfoegnarrosrotcetedlaudividnirof5-4-3 M/2

noitcnuFSAPteS secivedrofecneuqesmralaevitisopehttesotresuswollA 6-4-3 M/2

goLtnevEraelC seirtnereffubyrotsihtneveraelcotresuswollA 7-4-3 M/2

elbanEegdelwonkcAlabolG erutaeFegdelwonkcAlabolGehtselbanE 1-8-3 M/2

elbasiDegdelwonkcAlabolG erutaeFegdelwonkcAlabolGehtselbansiD 2-8-3 M/2

Table 2-4. Set Menu Function

NOTES: 1. For installation in the state of California, Alarm Verification Time must not exceed 30 seconds.

2. 1 = LEVEL ONE, 2 = LEVEL TWO, M = MANUFACTURER LEVEL

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

August 1999 76-100016-0012-10

Table 2-5. Test Menu Functions

NOTE: 1. WARNING: The Alarm Simulation Test must be used with care. When activated the Alarm Simulation Test (AST)processes pre-programmed outputs which are related to the activated (simulated) input device. Before using AST ensurethat any associated outputs are disconnected or isolated to prevent unexpected outputs (releases, signals or shutdowns).

2. 1 = LEVEL ONE, 2 = LEVEL TWO, M = MANUFACTURER LEVEL

noitcnuF noitpircseD alumroFsseccAleveL

tseTpmaL ytilanoitcnufsDELmetsystsetotresuelbanE 1-4 M/2/1

tseTeciveDpooLrorotcetedafotsetcinortcelenaetavitcaotresuswollA

srotcetedfopuorg1-2-4 M/2/1

tseTyrettaB yticapacyrettabyfirevottsetyrettabaetavitcaotresuswollA 3-4 M/2/1

tseTklaWelbanE tseTklaWotsecivedfoegnarayficepsotresuswollA 1-4-4 M/2

tseTklaWelbasiD edomtsetklawelbasidotresuswollA 2-4-4

tseTnoitalumiSmralAotstupnifopihsnoitalerdemmargorpyfirevotrellatsniswollA

.evitcaerastuptuogniyfirevdnastupnignitavitcaybstuptuo5-4 M/2

For latching mode: To return the system to normal, pressthe RESET button once. If powering 4-wire detector fromthe PEGAsys, the reset button will need to be pushed onceto reset the detector and once to reset the panel to a nor-mal condition.

g. In a non-latching operation once all alarms have cleared,the display will read: NO ACTIVE ALARM REMAINS. Atthis time, the system may be reset by operating the RESETpushbutton.

h. When the system is properly reset, the display will showthe System Status Normal message, time, day and date.The preceding will happen if no active troubles orsupervisories are present, in which case the ActiveTroubles or Active Supervisories message will be dis-played.

2-6.3 Active Supervisory Trouble ModeThe system enters supervisory trouble mode when it detects anabnormal condition on the system that has been defined to be amuch higher priority than a common trouble. This type of troubleis usually assigned by the installer/designer to monitor criticalparts of the system.

2-6.3.1 SUPERVISORY TROUBLE MODE INDICATION

The following indicates the system is in the supervisory troublemode of operation.a. The yellow SUPERVISORY and TROUBLE LEDs will be

flashing at a 1 second rate and there will be a pulsing buzzerat the CCM. This audible is distinctively different than analarm signal pattern at the CCM.

b. The 80 character display will cycle between all currentlyactive supervisory troubles. Example:

2-6.3.2 SUPERVISORY TROUBLE MODE USER ACTION

The following steps should be performed when the system isset into supervisory trouble mode of operation:a. To silence the supervisory trouble audible signal, all cur-

rent supervisories must be acknowledged by pressing theACKLDGE push button. This will silence the system buzzer.

b. When all supervisory trouble conditions have been acknowl-edged, the 80 character display will read: XXX ACTIVESUPERVISORY TROUBLES REMAIN. XXX representingthe total number of active supervisory troubles. All currenttrouble conditions can be viewed on the display by press-ing the scroll push button.

c. As each supervisory trouble condition is cleared, the dis-play will read one less active trouble until all supervisoriesare clear. When all active supervisory troubles have beencleared, the SUPERVISORY and TROUBLE LEDs will beextinguished and the 80 character display will show theStandby Message. (For example: "System Status Normal")

NOTE: The system has the option to acknowledge bothsupervisory and common troubles on a global basis.The panel by default will require that each trouble beacknowledged individually. However, if the installerwishes to enable this function it can be done byaccessing the "set" menu option using the CCMkeypad. Refer to Table 2-4 for more information onstepping through the menus to enable and disable

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

August 199976-100016-001 2-11

the Global Acknowledge function. With globalacknowledge a total of 30 troubles can beacknowledged at one time.

2-6.4 Active Trouble ModeThe system enters trouble mode when it detects an abnormalcondition which may prevent proper operation or display aprealarm condition. (Example: loss of communications with asmoke detector.) Refer to Appendix G for a complete list oftrouble conditions.

2-6.4.1 TROUBLE MODE INDICATIONS

The following indicates the system is in its trouble mode ofoperation.a. The yellow TROUBLE LED will be flashing at a 1 second

rate and there will be a pulsing panel buzzer at the CCP.This audible signal is distinctively different than the alarmaudible signal.

b. The 80 character display will cycle between all currentlyactive troubles and prealarms. Example:

2-6.4.2 TROUBLE MODE USER ACTION

The following steps should be performed when the system isset into the trouble mode of operation:a. To silence the trouble audible signal, all current trouble

conditions must be acknowledged by pressing theACKLDGE pushbutton. This will silence the system buzzer.

b. When all trouble conditions have been acknowledged, the80-character display will read: XXX ACTIVE TROUBLESREMAIN. XXX representing the total number of activetroubles. All current trouble conditions can be viewed onthe display by pressing the scroll pushbutton.

NOTE: The first 300 troubles (supervisory or common) on aSingle-Loop will be displayed only. Subsequent troublesor supervisories will not be displayed even if any or all300 troubles clear. However, all of the active troublesor supervisories will be processed and entered into theevent buffer. For a complete listing of all troubles andsupervisories over the initial 300, access the eventbuffer using the event buffer using the CCM keypad.

For the Multi-Loop the first 2100 troubles orsupervisories will be displayed. Subsequent troublesor supervisories over the first 2100 will not be displayedeven if any or all 2100 troubles or supervisories clear.However, all troubles or supervisories regardless of thetotal will be processed and entered into the event buffer.For a complete listing of all active troubles andsupervisories, access the event buffer through the CCMkeypad.

c. As each trouble condition is cleared, the display will read oneless active trouble until all troubles are cleared. When all ac-tive troubles have been cleared, the TROUBLE LED will beextinguished and the 80-character display will show thestandby message (For example: "System Status Normal").

NOTE: The system has the option to acknowledge bothsupervisory and common troubles on a global basis.The panel by default will require that each trouble beacknowledged individually. However, if the installerwishes to enable this function it can be done byaccessing the "set" menu option using the CCMkeypad. Refer to Table 2-4 for more information onstepping through the menus to enable and disable theGlobal Acknowledge function. With global acknowledgea total of 30 troubles can be acknowledged at one time.

2-7 PRINTING OPERATIONIn addition to the LCD display, the PEGAsys system informa-tion can be viewed using the Printer port of the CCM. For de-tailed information pertaining to connecting a RS-232 peripheraldevice, see the Chapter 7, Paragraph 7-18.

When the printer port is enabled and a serial printer is attachedthe system will print out all status change information and anysystem information lists that the user would request from thesystem using the integral keypad.

Serial-type annunciator devices may be connected to the printerport to provide graphical LED annunciator type indications tobuilding occupants. Contact Kidde application engineering forcompatible annunciator vendors.

2-8 SYSTEM PROGRAMMINGThe PEGAsys fire alarm system incorporates two unique pro-gramming languages that are easy to understand and use.These two versatile programming languages, Event OutputControl (EOC) and Real Time Control (RTC), can accommo-date most any fire alarm control logic application. Programmingthe system is accomplished by a personal computer via a sys-tem interface cable.

The two programs are constructed by the system Engineer/In-staller using the PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS) pro-gram which is Windows based. The PCS program allows theuser to configure, verify, upload, download, edit, retrieve, storeand print the entire system configuration program. Refer to thePCS users guide (P/N 76-014) for further details.

2-8.1 EOC ProgrammingThe Event Output Control (EOC) program logically combines thesystems input devices with the system's output devices. The pro-gram consists of sequentially numbered lines of equations con-taining input addresses, output addresses and logic operators.When an input becomes true (Active), the system processes theEOC program and activates any associated outputs as pro-grammed.

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

August 1999 76-100016-0012-12

EXAMPLE:

The simplest event output control (EOC) equation would be:

Input = Output

A basic equation with one or more inputs would be :

Input Operator Input = Output

The system normally processes the EOC from left to right. However,in equations with parenthesis the contents of the parenthesis areexecuted first. Refer to the PCS users guide (76-014) for furtherdetails.

2-8.1.1 LISTING EOC PROGRAMMING

The system's Event Output Control (EOC) program can be listedout using either the owner's or installer's menu functions. To list thesystems EOC programming:a. Access PEGAsys system menus by:

(1) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD(2) Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password.(3) Press the return (↵ ) key. Verify that the display reads:1:ISOLATE 2:LIST3:SET 4:TEST

b. Select the list EOC program by typing the function formula, 2-5-1.

The system will then list all lines of the Event Output Control pro-gramming on the LCD and any attached printer.

2-8.2 RTC ProgrammingThe RTC program language permits outputs to be controlled by thesystems real time clock. Outputs may be programmed to occur onan hour, day, week and month time control basis. Alarm and Prealarmthreshold levels of all or individual detectors can be increased or de-creased in sensitivity (within UL limits) under RTC control. The RTCprogramming also provides the ability to control RCU relays, I/Omodule Relays and smoke detector pre alarm and alarm set points.

The program consists of sequentially numbered lines each contain-ing control object, control content, time, date and day of week. Forfurther details refer to the PCS users guide.

2-8.2.1 LISTING RTC PROGRAMMING

The RTC program can be listed out using either the owners or in-stallers menu functions. To list the RTC programming:a. Access the PEGAsys system menus by:

(1) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD(2) Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password.(3) Press the return (↵ ) key. Verify that the display reads:1:ISOLATE 2:LIST3:SET 4:TEST

b. Select the list RTC program by typing the function formula, 2-5-2.

The system will then list all lines of the Real Time Control program-ming on the LCD and any attached printer.

2-8.2.2 ENABLE/DISABLE RTC PROGRAM LINE NUMBERS

Each line number of the RTC Program is automatically enabled whenentered into the system. Once a line number in the RTC Programhas been disabled using the procedure below, the line will be ignoredby the RTC Program until enabled. To enable a line number whichhas been previously disabled follow the below procedure selecting"ENABLE" in step b.a. Access the PEGAsys system menus by:

(1) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD(2) Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password.

b. Select the set RTC program by typing the function formula, 3-4-3. Verify the display reads:

1:ENABLE 2:DISABLEc. Select the desired choice and press return. Verify the display

reads:

RTC LINE NUMBER _ _ _d. Type the three digit line number and press the return key.e. You may continue with another RTC line or press backspace

key to cancel this function.

2-8.3 Types of Inputs and OutputsThe PEGAsys has various input and output devices/modules whichare discussed in the following paragraphs:

2-8.3.1 SYSTEM INPUTS

Devices which are classified as system inputs are smoke detectors,heat detectors, and addressable contact monitors (alarm, trouble,abort, waterflow, manual alarm, manual release, supervisory, andnormal). Refer to the PCS users (76-014) guide for further details.

2-8.3.2 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT (RCU)

The RCU input and output devices, which are connected to the RX/TX loop(s), are specified in EOC programming by the devices fourdigit address.

2-8.3.3 RX/TX LOOPS

The system specifies the RX/TX loop controller using its loop num-ber followed by three zeros (1000 for RX/TX 1) in single loop sys-tems and (1000 - 8000) in multi-loop systems. The specifier (1000-8000) will appear in cases when trouble conditions are present on aparticular RX/TX loop controller (i.e., a PC Line Short on RX/TX 1 -would be displayed as "RX/TX PC Line Short Loop 1").

RX/TX loop (zone) alarms occur if a loop device alarm initiates underone of the following conditions: Failed communications between the CCM and RX/TX module

(Trouble Condition) Failed RX/TX processor. (Trouble Condition) Failed input circuit of RCU device.An alarmed input device on the RX/TX (in FailSoft mode) can onlyactivate EOC programming if the RX/TX zone is used as a pro-grammed input (ZA1=1000, ZA2=2000, ZA8 = 8000, etc.).

2-8.3.4 SYSTEM OUTPUTS

Devices which are classified as system outputs are CCM - sig-nals and relays (programmable / non programmable); I/O mod-ules - signal outputs, relay outputs, agent release outputs, release

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

August 199976-100016-001 2-13

signal outputs, city tie outputs and digital I/O module outputs; Loopdevices - addressable relay output module.

2-8.3.5 SYSTEM I/O MODULES

The Input/Output modules which the systems support are SignalOutputs, Relay Outputs, Agent Release (agent & signal) outputsand the City Tie output.

2-8.4 Addressing I/O ModulesThe I/O modules include: Signal Audible, Relay Output, AgentRelease Output, City Tie output and the power supply module.I/O modules refer to any I/O module which installs into the op-tional I/O mother board with exception of the power supplymodule(s). The I/O modules communicate with the CCM overthe I/O bus.

Each module has inputs or outputs which can be individuallyaddressed. The I/O address consists of two alphabetic and twonumeric characters which define the module type, address andI/O circuit number. The I/O module address scheme is shownbelow.

SG 1 : 3

Module Address (1-8),See note 2.

I/O Circuit Number (1-4),See note 1.

Module Type,See note 3.

SG - Signal / Audible Output

RY - Relay Output

CT - City Tie Output

AR - Agent Release Output

RS - Release Signal Output

PS - Power Supply Monitor Module

NOTES:

1. The I/O modules vary in amount of inputs and outputs. Referto section one component description for thorough descrip-tions of options.

2. The PEGAsys system can support a total of 16 I/O modulesfor single loop and 23 I/O modules for multi-loop, 8 maximum ofany one type.

3. Power supply monitors only need an address, they have noneed for an output number.

The I/O module address is set using the three dip switches con-tained on each PCB assembly, each module uses different num-bered switches for module address assignment. The addressis set during the installation procedure by placing the switchesinto the correct position. Refer to the appropriate figure in Ap-pendix I for the particular module you are working with and theaddressing matrix. For a functional description of each module,refer to Chapter 3.

The switches would be set for each type of module in order. Forexample signal modules would be addressed 1 -8 if there wereeight in the system, relay modules would be addressed 1 - 8 if

there were eight in the system, and the same holds true for theremaining modules with the only exception being the City Tie mod-ule there can only be one of these modules in a system at anytime.

2-8.5 Registering I/O Module AssignmentsI/O modules are registered into the system configuration throughthe use of the PCS program. The installer would configure allmodules in the PCS program file and then upload this file to thesystem which would then internally verify the existence of the speci-fied modules. For further details on I/O module registration referto the PCS users guide.

Added RX/TX Modules in the multi-loop systems are automati-cally registered by the CCM upon system power-up.

2-8.5.1 LISTING I/O MODULE ASSIGNMENT

All I/O modules which are programmed into the system con-figuration may be listed out with the use of either the owners orinstallers menu functions.a. Access the PEGAsys system menus by:

(1) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD(2) Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password.(3) Press the return (↵ ) key. Verify that the display reads:1:ISOLATE 2:LIST3:SET 4:TEST

b. Select the list I/O address assignments by typing the func-tion formula, 2-6-2.

The system will then list all of the registered I/O module ad-dresses on the LCD and any attached printer.

2-8.6 Addressing RCUsRCUs refer to all devices which connect and operate from theRX/TX PC (power/communications) Line. These devices includeSmartOne smoke detectors, SmartOne heat detectors, addres-sable contact input monitors, and addressable output contactmodules.

Each device has a three digit numeric address. This address isstored in the non-volatile EEPROM memory of the device. Thesystem address is defined by the CCM by these three digitsand a fourth digit representing the RX/TX channel number.

There are three ways to address the RCU (Loop) devices. The RCUs can be addressed using the Hand Held Pro-

grammer (P/N 74-200013-001). This optional unit providesa convenient means of addressing RCUs without using theCCM.

The user may address the devices individually on the sys-tem by performing the procedure listed below.

To address RCUs using the SET RCU Address menu functioneach unaddressed RCUs must be connected to the RX/TX PCline one at a time. Perform the following steps for each RCU:a. Access the PEGAsys system menus by:

(1) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD(2) Type in the Level 2 password.(3) Press the return (↵ ) key. Verify that the display reads:

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

August 1999 76-100016-0012-14

1:ISOLATE 2:LIST3:SET 4:TEST

b. Select the set RCU address function by typing the functionformula, 3-3-1. Verify that the display reads:

PRESENT LOOP DEVICE ADDRESS _ _ _ _NOTE: All new addressable devices have an address of zero

(000).c. Enter the present RCU address and press return

pushbutton. The system will display the following:

TARGET LOOP DEVICE ADDRESS _ _ _ _d. Enter the desired address for the RCU / Detector, press

return. The system will now change the RCU address ifdifferent than previously noted.

The 40 character owner location message cannot be enteredusing the system keypad. The owners location message canonly be entered by use of the PCS program and uploaded intosystem memory.

2-8.7 Registering RCUsRegistration is where the device address is joined with the de-vice information in the system's memory. Device information iscomprised of; Device type, Device Messages and Device set-tings.

There are four ways to register the RCU (Loop) devices on tothe system. The user may register the devices individually on the sys-

tem Register all pre-addressed RCUs at once using RCU (Loop

Devices) registration function Register all pre-addressed RCUs using the Autolearn func-

tion, which sets all devices at default values and any sys-tem alarm input activates all system outputs. If pre-addresseddevices are used, multiple devices can be attached and reg-istered to the system all at one time using either the Autolearnor RCU Registration function.

RCUs can also be registered into the system by using thePCS program. The installer would specify each RCU to beconnected to the system and then upload the system con-figuration file to the system and then the system would su-pervise each device specified. Refer to the PCS users guidefor further details on RCU registration.

1004001-255 = Device Address (registered)000 = Device Address (un addressed/

un registered)

RXTX Loop Number1 for single Loop Systems,1-8 for Multi-Loop Systems

Example: RCU 1032 represents device 32 on RX/TX loop 1.

Connecting an unregistered RCU address (address 000) to theRX/TX will result in a not registered trouble (TBL NR) indicatingthat the control panel has communicated with the device and iden-tified the device as being unregistered.

Procedures for registering RCU devices using the register RCU func-

tion would be to attach all pre addressed loop devices to the PC lineof the RX/TX module. Power up the system (if it is not already run-ning). As the loop devices power up they will begin to communicatewith the RX/TX module. The CCM will recognize the loop devices asnot being not registered and raise a trouble for each not registered(TBL NR) device attached. When the register RCU function is en-abled the CCM will prompt the user to enter a range of loop deviceaddresses to register as valid system devices. At the conclusion ofthe register function the CCM will display the total amount of devicesregistered.

The AutoLearn function works much the same as the registrationfunction, where it will automatically enter the devices which it canidentify on the PC line of the RX/TX as not being registered intosystem configuration memory.

During both the Autolearn and RCU Registration procedures theCCM will automatically register the loop devices into memory andalso set each device to default settings (Sensitivity levels andInput reporting) for the particular device. The CCM will also set thedefault operation of the CCM outputs (MP01, MP02, MP03 andMP04). Any system alarm received after this time will cause allthe CCM outputs (MP01 - MP04) to activate.

Optionally, if the I/O motherboard and I/O modules have beeninstalled, the PCS program will need to be used to configure thesystem for use with the I/O modules. Procedures for registering I/O modules are provided in the PCS Users Guide (See Address-ing I/O Modules).

2-8.7.1 DETECTOR REGISTRATION

SmartOne smoke and heat detectors would be registered on tothe system in the same fashion as the RCUs explained in theprevious section. The only other information which requires se-lecting is detection devices application, the alarm and pre-alarm,levels and latching or non-latching. There are three specific ap-plications for smoke detector use: Open Area, Open Area (HighAir Flow) and Duct. The smoke and heat detectors pre-alarm andalarm set points are adjusted only when necessary if the userdesires the set points to be different from the default values foreach detector type.

The detectors will use the default values unless otherwise pro-grammed. To adjust the set points for the detectors, refer to Chapter5 Setting and Adjusting Smoke and Heat Detector Sensitivities.

The 40 character owner location message cannot be enteredusing the system keypad. The owners location message canonly be entered by use of the PCS program and uploaded intosystem memory.

2-8.7.2 ADDRESSABLE CONTACT MONITORREGISTRATION

The addressable contact monitor are registered on to the systemin the same fashion as the RCUs explained in the previous sec-tion. The system will by default, set the response of the deviceactivation to alarm. During system configuration using the PCSprogram the following choices are allowed - Alarm, Trouble, Abort,Supervisory, Manual Alarm, Manual Release, WaterFlow or Nor-mal. The following table describes the allowable selections forthe input RCU and their EOC relationships.

Contact monitor RCUs are also registered into the system byusing the PCS program. The installer would specify each ContactMonitor RCU to be connected to the system and then upload thesystem configuration file to the system and then the system wouldsupervise each device specified. Refer to the PCS users guide

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

August 199976-100016-001 2-15

for further details on RCU registration.

1: AlarmActive input initiates an alarm at the central controlpanel and is latched in the EOC until the system isreset after alarm has cleared.

2: TroubleActive input initiates a trouble at the central controlpanel, but does not latch EOC programming and willself restore upon deactivation.

3: AbortActive input initiates an abort condition at the centralcontrol panel. This will delay agent release if count-down has begun. It does not latch EOC program andwill self restore upon deactivation. There are 4 stylesof abort available for the device.

4: WaterflowActive input initiates a waterflow alarm condition at thecentral control panel and is latched in EOC programuntil reset. Signal outputs will be inhibited from being si-lenced.

5: Manual AlarmActive input initiates a manual alarm condition at thecentral control panel, latches in EOC program untilreset.

6: Manual ReleaseActive input initiates a manual release condition at thecentral control panel, causes instant release of pro-grammed output, latches in EOC program until reset

7: NormalActive input initiates a momentary display but does notlatch in EOC program, self restores.

8: SupervisoryActive input initiates a supervisory trouble at the cen-tral control panel, but does not latch the EOC, and willself-restore upon deactivation.

The 40 character owner location message cannot be enteredusing the system keypad. The owners location message canonly be entered by use of the PCS program and uploaded intosystem memory.

2-8.7.3 REMOTE RELAY REGISTRATION

The addressable contact output device is registered in thesame fashion as the previous RCU's.

Contact Output RCUs can also be registered into the systemby using the PCS program. The installer would specify eachContact Output RCU to be connected to the system and thenupload the system configuration file to the system and then thesystem would supervise each device specified. Refer to the PCSusers guide (76-014) for further details on RCU registration.

The 40-character owner location message cannot be enteredusing the system keypad. The owners location message canonly be entered by use of the PCS program and uploaded intosystem memory.

2-8.7.4 LISTING ALL REGISTERED RCUs

All RCUs registered on the system can be listed using either theowners or installers menu function. To list all registered RCUs

a. Access the PEGAsys system menus by:(1) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD(2) Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password.(3) Press the return (↵ ) key. Verify that the display reads:1:ISOLATE 2:LIST3:SET 4:TEST

b. Select the List RCU address function by typing the functionformula, 2-6-1. Verify that the display and any attached print-ers list all registered RCU addresses.

2-8.7.5 UN-REGISTERING RCUs

The system provides the capability to remove a single device orgroup of devices from the system configuration. This functionremoves the device address from the system memory but leavesthe address in the device intact. Performing this operation willcause the system to generate a trouble NR (Not Registered) forany devices which remain connected to the RX/TX PC line.Removal or disconnection of the device(s) from the PC line willclear the trouble condition(s) on the system.

This function would be used during a system retrofit where somedevices may be desired to be removed from the system tempo-rarily during a building renovation and then reattached after reno-vations are complete. This feature is very efficient because thedevice maintains its address information which speeds devicereregistering after the renovations.

To perform the device un-registering operation perform the fol-lowing:a. Access the PEGAsys system menus by:

(1) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD(2) Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password.(3) Press the return (↵ ) key. Verify that the display reads:1:ISOLATE 2:LIST3:SET 4:TEST

b. Select the set RCU De-Registration function by typing thefunction formula, 3-3-4. Verify that the display reads:

DEVICE DE-REGISTRATIONDEVICE FROM_ _ _ _TO_ _ _ _

c. Enter the desired RCU address(s) and press return. Thedisplay will read the following in response to verify the de-vice de-registration:

DEVICE DE-REGISTRATIONXX DEVICES DE-REGISTERED

d. Verify that the display changes to the device menu after 5seconds. The backspace key can be pressed to return tothe main menu.

e. To reregister RCU devices, perform the procedure which is out-lined in the RCU registration paragraph in this chapter.

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

August 1999 76-100016-0012-16

(THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)

August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

3-1

CHAPTER 3FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

3-1 INTRODUCTIONThis chapter provides a functional description of the devices/modules used in the PEGAsys system configuration. Each func-tional description covers one of the blocks shown in the overallblock diagram, Figure3-1.

3-2 BLOCK DIAGRAMThe PEGAsys system is divided into seven functional blocks asfollows:

Figure 3-1. Overall Block Diagram, Single-Loop System

Central Control Module Display Module RX/TX Module I/O Module RCUs (Field Devices) Power Supply ModuleAs described in Paragraph 1-1.2, the system comes in two con-figurations the single-loop system and multi-loop system. Theabove devices/modules for both configurations are shown inthe Overall Functional Block Diagrams, Figures 3-1 and 3-2.Each device/module is described in detail in Paragraph 3-3.

Figure 3-2. Overall Block Diagram, Multi-Loop System

DisplayModule

PowerSupply

CentralControlModule

OptionalI/O

Motherboard

OptionalI/O Module

Receiver/Transmitter

Module(RX/TX)

RCU's(Field Devices)

AC Line

BatteryBackup

24 VDC

24 VDC

24 VDC

I/O Bus

I/O Bus

RX/TX CCMComm

I/O Bus

24 VDC

Power/CommLine

DisplayModule

PowerSupply

CentralControlModule

Multi-Loop I/OMotherboard

OptionalI/O Module

Receiver/Transmitter

Module(RX/TX)

Up to 8 RX/TXModules

RCU's(Field Devices)

AC Line

BatteryBackup

RX/TX 24 VDC

24 VDC

I/O Bus

I/O Bus

RX/TX CCMComm

I/O Bus

24 VDC

Power/CommLine

RX/TX CCMComm

24 VDC 24 VDC

August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

3-2

3-3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTIONSThe functional descriptions will describe each device or mod-ule depicted in Figures 3-1 and 3-2.

3-3.1 Central Control ModuleThe Central Control Module (CCM) is available in two versions,P/N 76-100008-501 for single-loop and P/N 76-100008-600 formulti-loop. Figure 3-3 contains the main central processing unit,real time clock, watch dog timer and RS-232 serial communica-tion input/output ports. The CCM controls the operation andsupervision of all the system modules and software within thePEGAsys system. It receives loop device data from the RX/TXmodule, processes the data based on pre-programmed instruc-tions and transmits output commands to the output modules,field devices and display module(s).

The CCM provides two RS-232C serial ports for programmingand monitoring the PEGAsys system. These ports accept 6-wire RJ-12 modular connectors. The PCS program would beused to interface to the system for programming purposes. Amultilevel password scheme protects the system from unau-thorized access.

The real time clock provides the CCM with the ability to displaythe current time & date on the system LCD and control the sys-tem with time based programming.

Internal diagnostics enhance the troubleshooting ability of thesystem, examples: microprocessor failure, memory failure, RS-232 port troubles, etc..

Two individually programmable signal output circuits (MP1 &MP2) provided can be used for signaling devices (horns, strobes,bells) and allow up to 2.0 amps of 24 VDC power. One of thetwo outputs is programmed for releasing solenoid type suppres-sion equipment (Agent and Sprinkler type systems).

Two individually programmable relay outputs (MP3 & MP4) areprovided on the CCM for controlling building functions duringalarm occurrences. These relay outputs are activated throughthe EOC programming which allows system inputs to be re-lated to system outputs. Each of these relays have Form C style,rated at 1A, 30VDC.

One non programmable trouble relay is supplied which is nor-mally powered (24 VDC) and will transfer on any system trouble,supervisory, pre-alarm and complete power off condition. FormC contact rating 1A at 30VDC. Refer to DWG. No. 06-235443-001 in Appendix I for further installation details.

An event history buffer is provided on the CCM which will store1024 entries for single-loop and 6100 entries for multi-loop ofsystem event information and allow the operator to retrieve thisinformation for review of system operation. The PCS programprovides the ability to download, store and print all or a portionsof the Event History Buffer.

Figure 3-3. Central Control Module, Details

0V

JK

1

JK

2

PLG

2

JK

3

PLG

1

PLG

6

SW

1

PLG

2P

LG

3

PORT

DISP PRINT

PORT PORT

JK1JK2

0V24V 5V

PLG1P.C.

DISPLAY5V

JK3

1

BT1

JP2

PLG2

SOUNDER 2

JP4

SW1

JP3

TB4 TB5

SOUNDER 1

-RE

P1

+

A

- RE

P2

B

+ +

A

-

JP1

VOLT FREE RELAYS

C

TB1 TB2

+

B

- NO NO

1

NC C

2

NC

TB3

NC

V/F RELAY

FAULT

NO C

TB

6

FLT

SU

PP

LY

FLT

EA

RT

H

24

V

0V

TB6

JK4

RX

/TX

PO

RT

JK5

PO

RT

I/O

To ExternalPrinterTo ExternalPrinter

CCM ResetButtonCCM ResetButton

To Remote PC ForProgramingTo Remote PC ForPrograming

24VDC FromPower Supply24VDC FromPower Supply

To RX/TXLoop ControllerTo RX/TXLoop Controller

To I/O Modules andPower SuppliesTo I/O Modules andPower Supplies

DisplayPortDisplayPort

Proc.PortProc.Port Display ResetDisplay Reset

24VDC FromPower Supply24VDC FromPower Supply

See Note 2See Note 2See Note 2See Note 2

See Note 1

Note 1: The trouble relaycontacts are shown in theunpowered state.

Note 1: The trouble relaycontacts are shown in theunpowered state.

Note 2: Jumpers JP1-JP4 areused to configure MP01 to besignaling or releasing (default)outputs. Refer to Dwg. No.06-235443-001, in Appendix I,for further details.

Note 2: Jumpers JP1-JP4 areused to configure MP01 to besignaling or releasing (default)outputs. Refer to Dwg. No.06-235443-001, in Appendix I,for further details.

August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

3-3

Figure 3-4. Receiver/Transmitter Module, Details

1

2

3

4

4

2

3

1

STYLE 6 Signal Line Circuit

STYLE 4 Signal Line Circuit

74-200012-001

Mounted to RX/TX

LOOP ISOLATOR

4 3 2 1

24

V

24

V

RE

T

RE

T

RX/TX

NOTE: Adjacent loop isolators must be within 20ft. Of a device with wiring in conduitto be in accordance with NFPA Style 7 requirements.

CPU Reset

PC Line Normal

CPU Reset

PC Line Reset

Loop Isolatorfor Style 7(74-200012-001)

See Note

See Note

Loop

Isolator

Zone 1

Zone 2

Zone 3

Loop

Isolator

Loop

Isolator

Loop

Isolator

Note: Each zone can consist of 30 loop devicesbetween loop isolators

74-200012-001

Mounted to RX/TX

LOOP ISOLATOR

4 3 2 1

24

V

24

V

RE

T

RE

T

RX/TX

Loop

Isolator

Zone 1

Zone 2

Zone 3

Loop

Isolator

Loop

Isolator

Loop

Isolator

See Note

Loop

Isolator

Loop

Isolator

Note: Refer to jumper table on Dwg. 06-235371-002 in appendix I

STYLE 6 Signal Line Circuit, with Loop Isolator

STYLE 7 Signal Line Circuit

RX

/TX

76

-10

00

05

-00

1

3-3.2 Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX)The RX/TX functions as the hardware & software interface be-tween the loop devices and the CCM. Each installed RX/TXmodule continually monitors all addressable devices for alarmand trouble conditions. Each device is capable of initiating andsending alarm and trouble messages to the RX/TX module towhich it is connected.

The RX/TX receives control requests from the CCM and estab-lishes communications with the loop devices. The RX/TX re-ceives status changes from the loop devices and reports thesechanges to the CCM. The RX/TX shown in Figure 3-4 is ca-pable of communicating with up to 255 intelligent devices andcomplies with the Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) requirements ofNFPA-72 Style 4, 6 & 7. Style 4 initiation circuit wiring will per-mit T tapping or branch circuitry. Style 7 requires the use ofoptional loop isolator devices.

August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

3-4

Figure 3-5. Obsolete Power Supply/Charger Assembly (Revision A), Details

3-3.3 Power Supply/Charger Assembly, Rev. AThis power supply assembly was provided with earlier systems.Information is being provided for service purposes only. Thepower supply/charger assembly, Figure 3-5 (P/N 76-100009-001) is comprised of a printed circuit board (PCB) mounted ona AC / DC switching power module. The switching power pro-vides 4 amps of 24 VDC power from the 120 / 240 VAC inputpower. The PCB assembly is a microprocessor based unit whichprovides the system with Battery charging (up to 33 AH) and supervision Low Volt-

age Battery cutoff at 19VDC AC power supervision 24 VDC supervision Battery load test 24 VDC ground fault detection (+/-) Trouble relay that transfers upon any power supply trouble

or power off condition (Relay shown in the unpowered state) Auxiliary 24 VDC outputs (programmable for switched or

unswitched configurations)The auxiliary 24 VDC outputs rated at 1 Amp each and can beused to power 4 wire type detection devices such as smoke,flame and gas detectors which must be sized properly to staywithin output current limits.

The power supply/charger assembly is addressable and com-municates with the CCM over the I/O bus.

The power supply/charger assembly provides terminal connec-tions for an auxiliary power module. This module comes with 2different wiring harnesses, as follows: P/N 76-100009-002 is supplied with a 36" harness that is

meant to connect a main power supply/charger assemblyto the auxiliary power module in the main cabinet.

P/N 76-100009-003 is supplied with an 8" harness to mounta main power supply/charger assembly to an auxiliary powermodule in a expansion enclosure.

The addition of an auxiliary power module to the main powersupply/charger assembly will provide an additional 4 amps ofcurrent and make the total available current of 8 amps for thisassembly. The system can support up to 8 main power supply/charger assemblies with the capability of adding an auxiliarypower module to each one to provide a maximum available cur-rent of 64 amps. Each additional power supply/charger assem-bly (P/N 76-100009-001) would need to have a separate addressto operate in the system. The auxiliary power module wouldshare the same address as the main power supply/charger as-sembly that it is connected to. Refer to drawing number 06-235443-003, in Appendix I, for further installation details.

August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

3-5

POWER LIMITED TO 1.5 A DC

POWER LIMITED TO 1.5 A DC

CAUTION: THE VOLTAGE FOR THE TWO BATTERIES IN SERIES MUSTBE GREATER THAN 22 VDC BEFORE CONNECTION TO THE PANEL.

TWO (2) SEALEDLEAD-ACIDBATTERIES

Figure 3-6. Power Supply/Charger Assembly (Revision C), Details

3-3.4 Power Supply/Charger Assembly, Rev. C. Battery charging (up to 99 AH) and supervision Low Voltage Battery cutoff at 19VDC AC power supervision 24 VDC supervision Battery load test 2 auxiliary 24 VDC outputs, programmable for switched or

unswitched configuration Trouble relay that transfers upon any power supply trouble

or power off condition (Relay shown in the unpowered state)The power supply/charger assembly (P/N 76-100009-010) pro-vides terminal connections for an auxiliary power module. Thismodule is available with two different wiring harnesses, whichfollow: P/N 76-100009-002 is supplied with a 36" harness that is

meant to connect a main power supply/charger assemblyto the auxiliary power module in the main cabinet.

P/N 76-100009-003 is supplied with an 8" harness to mounta main power supply/charger assembly to an auxiliary powermodule in a expansion enclosure.

The addition of an auxiliary power module to the main powersupply/charger assembly will provide an additional 4 amps ofcurrent and make the total available current of 8 amps for thisassembly. The system can support up to 8 main power supply/charger assemblies with the capability of adding an auxiliarypower module to each one to provide a maximum available cur-rent of 64 amps. Each additional power supply/charger assem-bly (P/N 76-100009-010) would need to have a separate addressto operate in the system. The auxiliary power module wouldshare the same address as the main power supply/charger as-sembly that it is connected to. Refer to drawing number 06-235443-003, in Appendix I, for further installation details.

NOTE: The Rev. C. Power Supply/Charger assembly can bedistinguished from the Rev. A. version by the large heatsink on the right side of the unit.

August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

3-6

Figure 3-7. Multi-Loop I/O Motherboard, Details

3-3.5 Multi-Loop I/O MotherboardThe multi-loop I/O motherboard assembly, P/N 76-100017-001,is an assembly which can accept any combination of 9 mod-ules consisting of up to 8 RX/TX modules and provide connec-tions for up to 7 I/O module circuit board assemblies. The MLmotherboard is mounted to standoffs on the back of the mainsystem enclosure. It distributes the system 24 VDC power, CCM-RX/TX communications modules and I/O bus communicationsto the I/O modules. The I/O bus communications are providedby a RJ-12 (flat phone cable) style connection. A single RJ-12connection connects the ML motherboard to the CCM for RX/TX communications. The 24 VDC is provided by the systempower supply via a 2 conductor wiring harness connected to aterminal block (TB9) is distributed through terminal blocks (TB1-TB8) for connection on RX/TXs. The 24 VDC provided by thesystem power supply via 2 conductor wiring connected to ter-minal block TB-11 is distributed through I/O bus slots for power-ing I/O modules.

The RX/TX module communicates to the CCM via the multiplexerlocated on the motherboard. The CCM identifies each of the in-stalled RX/TX modules by the RS-232 connection on themotherboard. The table below lists each RX/TX communication

connection located on the motherboard and the loop number andaddresses assigned to the connected module. Refer to Drawing.No. 06-235443-012, in Appendix I, for installation details.

Table 3-1. Multi-Loop I/O Motherboard Connectors

ROTCENNOC POOL SSERDDA

1PJ 1 5521-1001

2PJ 2 5522-1002

3PJ 3 5523-1003

4PJ 4 5524-1004

5PJ 5 5525-1005

6PJ 6 5526-1006

7PJ 7 5527-1007

8PJ 8 5528-1008

August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

3-7

Figure 3-8. Signal Output Module, Details

12+

9-

10-

11+

8+

7+

6-

5-

NotUsed

Auxiliary Power

Sounder Circuits 1-4

Reset SwitchTrouble LED

TB1

Module AddressAssignment

See Note 2

12+

9-

10-

11+

8+

7+

6-

5-

12+

9-

10-

11+

8+

7+

6-

5-

12+

9-

10-

11+

8+

7+

6-

5-

10K EOR

CIRCUIT 1

CIRCUIT 3

10K EOR10K EOR

CIRCUIT 1

CIRCUIT 3

CIRCUIT 4

CIRCUIT 1

CIRCUIT 2

CIRCUIT 3

CIRCUIT 1

CIRCUIT 2

CIRCUIT 3

CIRCUIT 4

2 STYLE "Z"

1 STYLE "Z" AND 2 STYLE "Y"

2 STYLE "Y" AND 1 STYLE "Z"4 STYLE "Y"

Note 1: Refer to DWG. No. 06-235443-006,in Appendix I, for ConfigurationJumper (W1-W8).

2: Cut Jumpers W9 & W10 whenAuxiliary Power Input is used toremove module from RS-485power bus..

3: Only 8 of this Type Module canbe used on the system. Referto Section 1-2.7, in Chapter 1,for other limitations.

10K EOR

10K EOR

10K EOR

10K EOR10K EOR

10K EOR

10K EOR10K EOR

10K EOR

SIG

NA

LA

UD

76-1

00003-0

01

3-3.6 Signal Output ModuleThe PEGAsys panel has the capacity for a maximum of 8 Sig-nal Output modules, shown in Figure 3-8, thus providing 32 pos-sible signal circuits. Each Signal Output module is equippedwith supervised 24 VDC outputs which can operate as Style Yor Style Z indicating circuits. The module will allow for 4 StyleY or 2 Style Z or a mix of 2 Style Y and 1 Style Z. Eachcircuit is supervised for open, short and ground fault. The abilityto isolate individual outputs is accessed through the systemoperator menu options.

The alarm output circuits are polarity reversing type, rated for24 VDC signaling devices up to 2.0 Amp maximum per circuit.Careful consideration of alarm strobe in-rush currents has beenmade to help avoid any potential problems with the increasedpower requirements in support of the wide range of the ADA /UL 1971 signaling appliances in the marketplace. Refer to draw-ing number 06-235443-006 for installation details.

Power for normal standby and alarm operation derives from ei-ther of two sources; 1) primary supply up to its capacity, or 2)auxiliary power supply input. Provision for hardwire input of aux-iliary power has been made through the use of hardwire con-nections between the auxiliary power supply and terminals 1 &2 of the terminal block of the signal module. Output circuits arelisted for use in power limited applications.

Each circuit can be individually programmed via the PCS pro-gram for Continuous, Pulsed 60 or 120 BPM (March-Time) orCoded (Temporal Pattern) operation. Relation between eachsignal output and its input source shall be defined by the panelEOC logic program. In Walk Test mode the signal output circuit(s)shall sound the test signal if programmed properly. The walktest signal will be a 1.0 second pulse, then off until the nextdevice is activated.

August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

3-8

Figure 3-9. Relay Output Module, Details

Note: A maximum of 8 Relay Output Modules can be used on the system. Refer to paragraph 1-2.7, in Chapter 1, for other limitations.

RE

LA

Y7

6-1

00

00

4-0

01

3-3.7 Relay Output ModuleThe PEGAsys panel has the capacity for a maximum of 8 Aux-iliary Relay Output cards for up to 32 relays. Each AuxiliaryRelay Output card (shown in Figure 3-9) is equipped with 4Form C, dry contact relay outputs. The ability to isolate an indi-vidual relay output is accomplished through the system opera-tor menu.

The auxiliary relays are rated for 2.0 Amp @ 30 VDC & 1.0 Amp@ 120 VAC. Refer to Drawing. No. 06-235371-007, in Appen-dix I, for further installation details.

Each relay output can be individually programmed via the PCSprogram for operation. Relation between each relay output andits input source is defined by the panel EOC logic program. InWalk Test mode the relay output circuit(s) will not operate whenthe input device(s) under test are activated.

August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

3-9

Figure 3-10. Agent Release Output Module, Details

Module AddressAssignment

Reset Switch

Trouble LED

12

TB1

1Auxiliary Power

Release Circuits

Signal Circuits

See Note 2

Note 1: Only a maximum of 8 of this type module can be used on the system.Refer to paragraph 1-2.7, in Chapter 1, for other limitations.

2: W1 and W2 must be cut when the auxiliary power input is used.

RE

LE

AS

E7

6-1

00

00

1-0

01

3-3.8 Agent Release Output ModuleThe PEGAsys panel has the capacity for a maximum of 8 agentrelease output modules, which provides up to 8 possible releasecircuits and 24 maximum signal outputs on these modules.

Each Agent Release Output card is equipped with a 24V, su-pervised output which is programmable for solenoid-type dis-charge controls. The installer must select discharge control typerequired during software configuration programming. The cir-cuit shall be supervised for open or ground fault conditions. Theability for individual release output isolate is provided throughthe system operator menu.

Each card is equipped with supervised signaling outputs for 3Style Y 24 VDC polarity reversing type indicating circuits. Eachsignal circuit is supervised for open, short and ground fault con-ditions. The ability for individual output isolation is providedthrough the system operator menu. Careful consideration ofalarm strobe in-rush currents has been made.

The agent release output circuit is rated for 24 VDC controldevices. Each release output can supervise and activate up totwo (2) solenoid control heads.

Table 3-2 details all devices with which the agent release mod-ule is approved for operation.

Table 3-2. Approved Release Output Devices

rerutcafunaM sdioneloS

lawneF-eddiK&00568410005684

lawneF-eddiK 181098

lawneF-eddiK 494798

lawneF-eddiK 571998

lawneF-eddiK 036598

srerutcafunaMsuoiraV&,E,D,B,AspuorGMF

GsdioneloSrelknirpS

Power for standby and alarm operation of release and signalingoutputs shall derive from one of two sources; 1) primary supply upto its capacity, or 2) auxiliary power supply input. Input of auxiliarypower is hardwired through terminals 1 & 2 on the modules termi-nal block. Output circuits are Listed for use in Power Limited appli-cations. All signaling power is fully regulated.

August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

3-10

Figure 3-11. City Tie Module, Details

Note: Only 1 City Tie Module can be connected to the system.

CIT

YT

IE7

6-1

00

00

2-0

01

3-3.9 City-Tie ModuleThe City Notification Card (Figure 3-11) provides connection andoperation for Local Energy, Shunt type Master Box and ReversePolarity styles of output. The output type is selected by choosingwhich terminals terminate the field wiring. The module has an Am-ber LED to signify disconnect status. The ability for individual out-put isolate is provided through the system operator menu.

Local Energy-Type Output: Monitored output for trip circuit wir-ing and Master Box coil status (Set/Unset), current limited at550 mA, 24 VDC. Monitored for open, short and ground fault.

Shunt-Type Output: Unsupervised contact rated at 5.0 Amp,24 VDC resistive.

Reverse Polarity-Type Output: Unsupervised output for tripcircuit wiring only, current limited at 100 mA, 24 VDC.

Reverse Polarity output circuits are listed for use in Power Lim-ited applications. Refer to Drawing. No. 06-235443-008 for fur-ther installation details.

The City Tie Module will operate during PEGAsys' FailSoftmode. Any system alarm will cause the output to transfer.

In Walk Test mode the city notification outputs shall be disabled.In addition, the output has provisions for manual disable or iso-late through the operator menu function. The initiation of a walktest will institute a system trouble causing the city tie output totransfer to the trouble state.

August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

3-11

3-3.10 Field DevicesThe SmartOne Series of Intelligent Fire Alarm devices providethe PEGAsys control system with smoke & heat detection, nec-essary monitoring and control functions required by todays ad-vanced Fire Alarm systems. Each of the SmartOne devicesfeatures an intrinsic microprocessor with 4K of nonvolatilememory. Each device constantly monitors its surrounding envi-ronment and makes decisions in response to that informationthen reports status as required to the control panel. Each loopdevice communicates with the RX/TX module over the PC(power/communications) line.

This Distributed Intelligence architecture allows each loop de-vice to make decisions within the monitored area. This uniqueutilization of processing power makes possible a system of loopdevices with greater capacity and flexibility than any typical ad-dressable device system with centralized processing.

Each SmartOne device contains a status LED which blinks invarious patterns to indicate device status. The blink rates andassociated status levels are as follows:

Blink Rate Operation status

9 Second Rate Normal mode

2 Second Rate Alarm (activated)

Off (not blinking) Trouble condition

The following three paragraphs describe each type of availabledetector. A typical detector is shown in Figure 3-12.

3-3.11 SmartOne Ionization DetectorsThe SmartOne Ionization smoke detectors provide true distrib-uted intelligence addressable microprocessor based smoke de-tection to the PEGAsys system. Model CPD-7052 is a dualchamber analog ionization type detector which senses both vis-ible and invisible smoke. A unique sensing chamber permits360° smoke entry and response. Each detector is electronicallyaddressable and can be fully field programmed. Calibration, de-vice address, pre-alarm & alarm sensitivity set points and driftcompensation algorithm are stored in each detectors non vola-tile memory.

SmartOne Ionization detectors have an unobtrusive low profilelook and are available using the following: Model CPD 7052 SmartOne Ionization Detector:

P/N 70-402001-100

3-3.12 SmartOne Photoelectric DetectorsThe SmartOne Photoelectric smoke detectors provide true dis-tributed intelligence addressable microprocessor based smokedetection to the PEGAsys system. Model PSD-7152 is a ana-log photoelectric type detector which responds to a broad rangeof smoldering and flaming type fires. A unique sensing cham-ber permits 360° smoke entry and response. Each detector iselectronically addressable and can be fully field programmed.Calibration, device address, pre-alarm & alarm sensitivity setpoints and drift compensation algorithm are stored in eachdetector's nonvolatile memory.

SmartOne photoelectric detectors have an unobtrusive low pro-file look and are available using the following: Model PSD 7152 SmartOne Photoelectric Detector:

P/N 71-402001-100

Figure 3-12. Typical Detector

3-3.13 SmartOne Heat DetectorsThe SmartOne heat detectors provide true distributed intelli-gence addressable microprocessor based heat detection to thePEGAsys system. Model THD-7252 is a analog fixed tempera-ture thermistor type detector which does not respond to rate ofrise conditions until its programmed set point is met. Uniquealgorithms are used to compensate for heat rise without prob-lems associated with false alarms due to elevated rates of risein ambient temperature.

A unique sensing chamber permits 360° heat entry and re-sponse. Each detector is electronically addressable and canbe fully field programmed. Calibration, device address, pre-alarm& alarm sensitivity set points and drift compensation algorithmare stored in each detector's nonvolatile memory.

SmartOne Heat detectors have an unobtrusive low-profile lookand are available using the following: Model THD 7252 SmartOne Heat Detector:

P/N 70-404001-100

3-3.14 Addressable Contact Input DevicesThe PEGASYS Contact Monitor (P/N 70-407008-00X) allowsan installer the ability to interface typical NO/NC fire alarm de-vices, such as water flow and tamper switches to the PEGAsyssystem. The contact monitor is also used to interface to theManual Alarm, Manual Release and Abort Stations. The ad-dressable contact monitor device is programmable to report inthe following manners: Alarm (default), Trouble, Manual Alarm,Waterflow Alarm, Manual Release, Abort, Supervisory and Nor-mal (Silent input). Its default setting is alarm when programmedusing the Autolearn function.

The unit includes a connection for an optional status LED whichallows the device to indicate its present operating status. In nor-mal standby mode the LED will flash every 9 seconds, in troublecondition the LED will be extinguished, when activated the LEDwill flash every 2 seconds. Addressable Contact Input Device (NO):

P/N 70-407008-001. Addressable Contact Input Device (NC):

P/N 70-407008-002.

August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

3-12

Ω

Ω

Figure 3-13. Addressable Contact Input Device

3-3.15 Addressable Relay Output DevicesThe addressable relay output device (P/N 70-408004-001) pro-vides the PEGAsys system with a Form C dry contact inter-face for remote control applications. The device connects directlyto the RX/TX multiplex loop and contains an SPDT relay forcontrol of auxiliary equipment. The device can be activatedthrough the systems EOC or RTC programming and its defaultoperation programming is done during the Autolearn function.

The unit includes an intrinsic status LED which allows the de-vice to indicate its present operating status. In normal standbymode the LED will flash every 9 seconds, in trouble conditionthe LED will be extinguished, in activated condition the LED willflash every 2 seconds. Addressable Relay Output Device:

P/N 70-408004-001

MO

DE

LA

O

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

SE

EIN

STA

LL

AT

ION

CA

T.

NO

.7

0-4

08

00

4-0

01

Sm

art

On

eT

M

FO

RS

ER

VIC

ES

EN

DT

O:

KID

DE

-FE

NW

AL

,IN

C.

40

0M

AIN

ST.

AS

HL

AN

D,

MA

01

72

1

DA

TE

OF

MA

NU

FA

CT

UR

E:

MA

X.

INS

TA

LL

.T

EM

P.

12

0°F

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

06

-23

55

77

-00

1

PCPCPCPC(+)(-)(+)(-)N/CCOMN/O

PC LineIn

(+)

(-)

(+)

(-)PC Line

Out

N/O

COM

N/C

FieldConnections

TE

RM

INA

LS

5-7

AR

EP

OW

ER

LIM

ITE

D

TE

RM

INA

LS

1-4

AR

EP

OW

ER

LIM

ITE

D

7

6

5

Form-C contact rated at:0.6 A @ 120 VAC2.0 A @ 30 VDC (resistive)1.0 A @ 30 VDC (inductive)

Figure 3-14. Addressable Relay Output Device

3-3.16 Model DH-2000 Air Duct HousingThe DH-2000 air duct housing is designed for detecting par-ticles of combustion in air handling systems. Upon smoke de-tection the system can be programmed to control a variety ofdevices like HVAC fans and power shut down preventing un-necessary damage to the facility.

The duct housing accepts either the PSD-7152 or CPD-7052smoke detectors. A transparent Lexan cover over the detectionchamber allows visual inspection of the duct detector chamberand the internal smoke detector status. Sampling of the air inthe duct is accomplished through the use of sampling tubeswhich extend into the HVAC duct. Model DH-2000 Air Duct Housing:

P/N 70-403001-100 Model DH-2000 CPDI Air Duct Housing with Ion Det.:

P/N 70-403001-052 Model DH-2000 PSDI Air Duct Housing with Photo Det.:

P/N 70-403001-152Refer to DH-2000 Installation manual 74-222 (P/N 06-235398-001) for further details.

Figure 3-15. DH-2000 Air Duct Housing

3-3.17 Loop Isolator DevicesThe SmartOne series of loop devices offer optional loop isola-tion which protects the loop from wire-to-wire short conditions(NFPA 72 Style 7). The isolators will open the loop between twoisolators in the presence of a short circuit condition, thus allow-ing the remainder of the loop to operate normally, however, atrouble indication for the devices effected by the isolation willbe prompted on the panel. The isolators will return to normaloperation when the short condition has been removed from theeffected wires.

The loop isolators are offered in three package styles, one standalone style in a single gang electrical box arrangement, a sec-ond in a detector base module arrangement which allows theunit to be mounted behind a smoke detector in the 6 detectorbase and a third which mounts directly on the RX/TX module.

The single gang mount unit includes intrinsic status LEDs whichallows the device to indicate in which direction the short condi-tion is being detected. In normal standby mode the LED will beextinguished, in activated condition the LED will be on continu-ously. Loop Isolator RX/TX mount:

P/N 74-200012-001 Loop Isolator Stand-alone (Single Gang):

P/N 74-200012-002 Loop Isolator 6 detector base mount:

P/N 74-200012-004

August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

3-13

Figure 3-16. Loop Isolator, RX/TX Mount

Figure 3-17. Loop Isolator, Stand-Alone

Figure 3-18. Loop Isolator, 6" Detector Base Mount

August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

3-14

(THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)

August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

4-1

CHAPTER 4MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

4-1 INTRODUCTION.This chapter contains maintenance instructions for the PEGAsys.These procedures should be accomplished on a scheduled ba-sis. In the event that system problems are found during the per-formance of a procedure, refer to Chapter 5 for corrective action.

4-2 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE.The scheduled maintenance of the system should be performedat an established interval. The interval that the maintenanceprocedures are performed should not exceed any imposed regu-lations (NFPA 72 or local codes).

4-3 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES.The following paragraphs outline general scheduled mainte-nance procedures to be performed on an as-necessary basis.

4-3.1 Lamp TestThis test allows the user to check the system display LEDs.The step-by-step procedure to perform the lamp test follows:a. Access the PEGAsys system menus by:

(1) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD(2) Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password.(3) Press the return (↵ ) key. Verify that the display reads:1:ISOLATE 2:LIST3:SET 4:TEST

b. Press number 4 push-button, verify that the display reads:

1:LAMP TEST 2:LOOP DEVICES3:BATTERY TEST SCROLL for more

c. Press number 1 push-button, verify that the display reads:

***LAMP TEST******VERSION 1.0***

d. Ensure the following LEDs are momentarily lit:

POWER ON ALARMTROUBLE SUPERVISORYGROUND FAULT PREALARMCPU ERROR SILENCE

4-3.2 Loop Device TestThe PEGAsys system provides a unique detector test functionwhich allows a user to initiate a test of a detection device throughthe use of the system menus and verify the detection device(s)

is operating as intended. The test actually stimulates the detec-tion chamber of the device and verifies the response from thedevice. The CCM will report a result of the test for each devicetested.

NOTE: This test has a pass or fail result. It will not activatealarm outputs on the system.

The step-by-step procedure to perform the loop device test fol-lows:

NOTE: Addressable Contact Input Modules cannot be testedwith this procedure. This is for SmartOne smoke andheat detectors only.

a. Access the PEGAsys system menus by:(1) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD(2) Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password.(3) Press the return (↵ ) key. Verify that the display reads:1:ISOLATE 2:LIST3:SET 4:TEST

b. Press number 4 push-button, verify that the display reads:

1:LAMP TEST 2:LOOP DEVICES3:BATTERY TEST SCROLL for more

c. Press number 2 push-button, verify that the display reads:

START DEVICE TESTTEST DEVICES FROM _ _ _ _TO_ _ _ _

d. Enter the device address to be tested and then press thereturn push-button.

e. Verify the display scrolls through each selected addressand read as below:

START DEVICE TESTTESTING (Device Address #)

f. When the device testing is completed the display will read:

TEST COMPLETED(Address #) TEST (PASSED or FAILED)

g. Press the SCROLL push-button to read the status of eachdevice tested.

4-3.3 Battery TestThis test allows the user to activate a battery test to verify bat-tery capacity. The step-by-step procedure to perform the bat-tery test follows:a. Access the PEGAsys system menus by:

(1) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD(2) Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password.(3) Press the return (↵ ) key. Verify that the display reads:1:ISOLATE 2:LIST3:SET 4:TEST

August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

4-2

b. Press number 4 push-button, verify that the display reads:

1:LAMP TEST 2:LOOP DEVICES3:BATTERY TEST SCROLL for more

c. Press number 3 push-button, verify that the display reads:

BATTERY TESTBATTERY TEST ON PS*_ _

d. Enter the power supply address which the batteries areconnected to. Verify the display reads:

BATTERY TESTTEST ACTIVATED ON PS(_ _)

e. Upon the completion of the test the display will read:

TEST ON PS(_ _) COMPLETED>_>_ _._V

f. Verify that the voltage is within allowable tolerances.

4-3.4 Walk TestThe PEGAsys system provides a one person walk test func-tion. This allows the service person to enable a group of de-vices for walk test, then proceed through the installationactivating the specified devices. The system will respond to eachactivation with a short burst of the programmed signal circuit.The related signal circuit will only be pulsed if it has been con-figured for the Walk Test feature when defining it in the PCSsoftware.

During the system installation/configuration operation the in-staller would need to enable each signal circuit installed in thesystem for Walk Test, if desired. The systems signal outputsdefault to walk test disabled. When walk test is activated andcarried out the system enters each activation with a time anddate stamp. The operator can then print out all walk test resultsfor review.

The walk test feature can be deactivated two ways, the serviceperson can deactivate it through the user menus or the walktest function will time out after 10 minutes of non activation en-suring system response if the service person is called away foran extended period of time.

NOTE: When the walk test is active the panel will annunciatea trouble condition.

4-3.4.1 WALK TESTING DETECTORS

Place the system in walk test as described in Paragraph 4-3.4.2.To place a detector into alarm perform the applicable proce-dure below:

Smoke Detectors:

When testing SmartOne smoke detectors use a "punk-stick" or"cotton wick" to generate smoke. Apply smoke to the detectorfor a minimum of 10 seconds. When a sufficient amount ofsmoke has entered the device, the control panel will respondwith an alarm indication. The status LED of the detector willflash at a 2 second rate during the alarm period. Use of aerosolsmoke simulation product may be used if acceptable to theAuthority having Jurisdiction and if the product is used as di-rected in the instructions.

Heat Detectors:

When testing SmartOne heat detectors use of a low poweredheat gun is acceptable. Heat the detector for a minimum of tenseconds. When a sufficient amount of heat has been detectedby the detector, the control panel will respond with an alarmindication. The status LED of the detector will flash at a 2 sec-ond rate during the alarm period. Take care during the heatingof the detector to avoid over heating the plastic housing. Main-tain a minimum of 1 foot between the detector and the heat gunnozzle. Use of open flame devices are not recommended asdiscoloration of the plastic housing is likely and this is a poten-tially hazardous practice.

4-3.4.2 WALK TEST PROCEDURE

The step-by-step procedure to perform the walk test follows:a. Access the PEGAsys system menus by:

(1) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD(2) Type in the Level-2 password.(3) Press the return (↵ ) key. Verify that the display reads:1:ISOLATE 2:LIST3:SET 4:TEST

b. Press number 4 push-button, verify that the display reads:

1:LAMP TEST 2:LOOP DEVICES3:BATTERY TEST SCROLL for more

c. Press the SCROLL push-button, verify that the displayreads:

4:WALK TEST 5:ALARM SIM TESTd. Press number 4 push-button, verify that the display reads:

1:START WALK TEST 5:STOP WALK TESTe. Press number 1 push-button, verify that the display reads:

START DEVICE WALK TESTWALK TEST STARTED ON LOOP( _ _)

f. After completion of the walk test, press number 2 push-button to disable the walk test mode.

4-3.5 Alarm Simulation Test (AST)The PEGAsys system provides a feature which allows the sys-tem installer/inspector to verify the actual output operation inrelation to the input(s) which are programmed to activate theoutput of interest. The service person would enable the ASTfunction for a particular input and the system would operate theoutput(s) as it is programmed in the Event Output Control pro-gram. The system will respond with an alarm condition whenthe AST feature is enabled. The user would have to disable theAST when output operation has been verified.

WARNING

Any outputs which are controlling critical pro-cesses or agent releasing should be physically dis-connected from the process or agent container toavoid unwanted shutdowns and/or agent releases.When the AST function is enabled the pre- pro-grammed outputs for the activated input(s) willactivate.

August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

4-3

4-3.5.1 AST PROCEDURE

The step-by-step procedure to perform the AST follows:a. Be sure to observe the above warning.b. Access the PEGAsys system menus by:

(1) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD(2) Type in the Level-2 password.(3) Press the return (↵ ) key. Verify that the display reads:1:ISOLATE 2:LIST3:SET 4:TEST

c. Press number 4 push-button, verify that the display reads:

1:LAMP TEST 2:LOOP DEVICES3:BATTERY TEST SCROLL for more

d. Press the SCROLL push-button, verify that the displayreads:

4:WALK TEST 5:ALARM SIM TESTe. Press number 5 push-button, verify that the display reads:

ALARM SIMULATION TESTDETECTOR ADDRESS _ _ _ _

f. Type in the selected device address and then press thereturn push-button. Verify that the display reads:

ALARM SIMULATION TEST1:ACTIVATE 2:DE-ACTIVATE

g. Press number 1 push-button and then the return push-but-ton. Verify that the system responds as programed.

h. Press the ACKLDGE push-button to acknowledge thealarm.

i. De-activate the AST programming by:(1) Repeat steps b. through f.(2) Press number 2 push-button and then return (↵ ).

4-4 DISARMING AND REARMING RELEASECIRCUITS

The disarming and rearming procedures which follow must beperformed when testing the PEGAsys system. Prior to preced-ing ensure the notes below from NFPA 72 Chapter 7 are under-stood.

IMPORTANT NOTES1. "Testing personnel shall be familiar with the specific arrange-

ment and operation of the suppression system(s) and re-leasing function(s) and cognizant of the hazards associatedwith inadvertent system discharge."

2. "Occupant notification shall be required whenever a firealarm system configured for releasing service is being ser-viced or tested."

3. "Discharge testing of suppression systems shall not be re-quired by this code. Suppression systems shall be securedfrom inadvertent actuation, including disconnection of re-leasing solenoids/electric actuators, closing of valves, otheractions, or combinations thereof, as appropriate for thespecific system, for the duration of the fire system testing."

4. "Testing shall include verification that the releasing circuitsand components energized or actuated by the fire alarmsystem are electrically supervised and operate as intendedon alarm."

5. "Suppression systems and releasing components shall bereturned to their normal condition upon completion of sys-tem testing."

4-4.1 Disarming Release CircuitsPerform the following step-by-step procedure prior to systemtesting.a. Isolate all agent release circuits using the system menu

(Refer to Paragraph 2-5.4.1).WARNING

Use safety precautions when removing solenoidsand connections from initiators (i.e. use the short-ing cap when the initiators are disconnected) toprevent unwanted discharge or activation.

b. Physically remove the solenoids at the storage containers.WARNING

The suppression system is now fully disarmed fromall automatic activation and, in some cases, allmanual activation.

c. The system can now be tested without the risk of an inad-vertent release of agent.

4-4.2 Arming Release CircuitsPerform the following step-by-step procedure upon completionof system testing.a. Verify that all solenoids are disconnected from storage con-

tainers.b. Isolate all agent release circuits using the system menu

(Refer to Paragraph 2-5.4.1).c. Reconnect the solenoids at the storage containers.d. Ensure the system is free of any alarms to prevent unwanted

discharge or activation.e. De-isolate agent release circuit(s).f. The system is now in full operation in accordance with sys-

tem programming.

4-5 POWERING DOWN THE SYSTEM

4-5.1 Power-Down ProcedureThe step-by-step procedure to power-down the system follows:a. Ensure that the panel does not have any active alarms to

prevent unwanted discharge or activation.CAUTION

If alarms do exist during power-down, power-up ofthe panel will cause a reactivation of the alarm se-quence and possible activation of the suppressionsystem.

b. Disarm release circuits as per Paragraph 4-4.1.

August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

4-4

c. Remove DC power by disconnecting batteries first.d. Remove AC power by shutting off the circuit breaker to the

panel, second.

4-6 POWERING UP THE SYSTEM

4-6.1 Power-Up Procedurea. Ensure that all solenoids are disconnected from the stor-

age containers to prevent unwanted discharge or activa-tion.

b. If the system has been powered down energize the systemby performing the following steps:(1) Set the circuit breaker for the CCP power to ON. Verify

that the display reads "Main Processor Power On" andthat the CPU ERROR indicator is lit. Ensure that theaudible device is buzzing continuously.

(2) Press the display module reset switch. Verify that theCPU ERROR indicator is extinguished and the audibledevice is silenced.

(3) Verify that the display reads as follows:MAIN PROCESSORPOWER ON(4) After ten seconds, verify that the display reads as fol-

lows:RXTX NON-MONITORING TROUBLE ONRXTX1

NOTE: The RX/TX message will repeat itself for each RX/TXmodule in the system while the system initializes itself.This initialization can take up to 90 seconds.

(5) Verify that the POWER ON and TROUBLE indicatorsare lit.

(6) Connect the backup batteries to the CCP in accordanceto the procedure in Chapter 7.

(7) Press the ACKLDGE push-button. After approximatelyone minute the display will momentarily read:

RXTX NON-MONITORING TROUBLE OFF(8) Verify the display reads the correct time and date. If

the incorrect time is displayed perform step a.9.(9) Set time and date as follows:

(a) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:

PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD(b) Type in the default 1st level password (987).

(c) Press the return (↵ ) key. Verify that the displayreads:

1:ISOLATE 2:LIST3:SET 4:TEST

(d) Type in 3111 on the keypad. Verify that the dis-play reads:

SYSTEM TIME (AM/PM)ENTER THE TIME _ _ : _ _ (HH:MM)

(e) Type in the time (HH=hours 0-12 and thenMM=minutes 0-59). Press the return key. Verifythat the display reads:

SYSTEM TIME (AM/PM)1:AM 2:PM

(d) Type in appropriate selection (1 for AM or 2 forPM).

c. Rearm release circuit per Paragraph 4-4.2.

August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

5-1

CHAPTER 5TROUBLESHOOTING AND CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5-1 INTRODUCTIONThe effectiveness of this chapter is greatly increased by firstreading the entire manual. The service technician must have asure understanding of the purpose and correct function of themodule/device before attempting corrective maintenance. Thischapter contains instructions to aid a technician in locating faultymodules/devices.

This chapter also provides instructions for the removal and re-placement of the replaceable modules/devices of the PEGAsyssystem.

WARNING

All service to panel must be done with panel pow-ered down to prevent damage to panel compo-nents, personnel injury, or both

5-2 STANDARD FAULT-ISOLATION TECHNIQUESFailure of the PEGAsys system to function properly will usuallybe caused by one or more of the following faults:a. Failure of the Power Supplyb. Burned Out Indicatorc. Damaged Wiring or Corrosione. Component FailureWhen a failure occurs and the cause is not known, check asmany of these items as is practical before starting a detailedcheck. If possible, obtain information about any changes takingplace that may affect the system.

5-2.1 Visual InspectionWhen troubleshooting, the fault may often be discovered throughvisual inspection alone. Some faults, such as burned out indi-cators, shorted transformers, or wiring, can be located by sightor smell. Check for smoke or the odor of burned or overheatedparts. Look for loose connections. Visual inspection is also use-ful in avoiding damage to the system which could occur throughimproper servicing methods. Refer to Table 5-1, Troubleshoot-ing Index, and the paragraphs of this chapter for troubleshoot-ing beyond visual inspection.

5-2.2 Power ChecksMany faults on the system can be caused by problems withpower. Ensure battery and line voltages are checked prior totroubleshooting the system.

5-3 TROUBLESHOOTINGThe PEGAsys system utilizes internal programming for con-tinuous system testing. Most system faults can be isolatedthrough the operation of the front panel. Users/technicianscan initiate various testing via the use of the system menu(See Paragraph 2-5) after entering a valid password.

Table 5-1. Troubleshooting Index

eciveD/eludoMdeliateD

noitartsullI

lanoitcnuFnoitpircseDhpargaraP

tnemecalpeRerudecorP

lortnoClartneCeludoM

3-3 1.3-3 2.4-5

-ttimsnarT/revieceRXTXReludoMre

4-3 2.3-3 3.4-5

ylppuSrewoPeludoM

6-3&5-3 4.3-3&3.3-3&7.7-7,6.7-7

8.7-7

pooL-itluMdraobrehtoM

7-3 5.3-3

O/IcisaBdraobrehtoM

6-1 5.2-1 5-7

tuptuOlangiSeludoM

8-3 6.3-3 1.7-7

tuptuOyaleReludoM

9-3 7.3-3 2.7-7

esaeleRtnegAeludoM

01-3 8.3-3 3.7-7

eludoMeiTytiC 11-3 9.3-3 4.7-7

eciveDdleiF -- 8.3-3 4.4-5

elbasserddAtupnItcatnoC

eciveD11-3 21.3-3 4.4-5

yaleRelbasseddAeciveDtuptuO

21-3 31.3-3 4.5-5

gnisuoHtcuDriA 31-3 41.3-3 launaMeeS

srotalosIpooL-3urht41-3

6151.3-3

August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

5-2

5-4 REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

The following paragraphs provide required tools and step-by-stepreplacement procedures for the PEGAsys. The proceduresshould also be used to assist module and device installation.

CAUTION

Some components are subject to damage fromelectrostatic discharge (ESD). These componentsare not to be removed from their protective wrap-pings until they are to be installed in their respec-tive equipment locations, and then only bypersonnel connected to earth ground.

5-4.1 Required ToolsThe following tools will be required to perform the removal andreplacement procedures.a. Small Flat-Blade Screwdriverb. 6" Flat-Blade Screwdriverc. No. 2 Philips Screwdriverd. Wire Stripere. Small Needle Nose Pliersf. Ground strap

5-4.2 Central Control ModuleThe following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure forreplacing the CCM.a. Ensure all programming is saved using PCS software.b. Disconnect plugs from the I/O Port and RX/TX port, and PC

port (if connected to IIM)c. Remove the wiring from TB6.d. Remove the six mounting screws while holding the CCM in

place.e. Remove CCM from cabinet.f. Remove new CCM from packing and inspect for physical

damage.g. Install new CCM in the reverse order of removal.

5-4.3 RX/TX ModuleThe following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedurefor replacing the RX/TX module. Depending on the system con-figuration refer to the appropriate Figure, 5-1 or 5-2.

Ensure that the RX/TX jumpers are set properly during the pro-cedure. Verify that the settings of the jumpers on the RX/TXModule conform to the wiring style of the system being installed.The RX/TX is shipped from the factory programmed for Style 6wiring style. Refer to drawing 06-235443-002, in Appendix I, theinstallation drawing which shows the jumper locations on theRX/TX module. The settings are used to set the wiring style ( 4, 6or 7), with 7 being used with loop isolators. Jumpers on the RX/TXModule are noted by JP x and Wx (x = a single digit) call-outs onthe module board. Table 5-2 lists the types of allowable configura-tions you can select along with their respective jumpers.

a. Disconnect plug from terminal T1.b. Remove the two mounting screws from the module and move

module to gain access to connected wiring.c. Remove the plug from the RS-232 port.d. Remove power plug from connector jack J1.e. Remove new RX/TX module from packing and inspect for

physical damage.f. Ensure jumper configuration is set.g. Install new RX/TX in the reverse order of removal.

Figure 5-1. Installation for Single Loop

Figure 5-2. Installation for Multi-Loop

August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

5-3

Table 5-2. RX/TX Configuration Selection

repmuJ 4elytS 6elytS6elytSpooL/WrotalosI

7elytS

2W&1W nepO detrohS detrohS detrohS

2PJ detrohS detrohS nepO nepO

3PJ detrohS detrohS nepO nepO

NOTE: Style-7 requires the use of loop isolators, the RX/TXmodule requires the use of one (1) P/N 74-200012-001 isolator module to operate in the Style-7configuration.

5-4.4 Field DevicesThe following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedureto replace field devices into the PEGAsys system.

NOTE: Smoke and heat detectors can be replaced withoutpowering down the system. If adding new loop devicesto the system, then the panel will need to be powereddown.

NOTE: If device is in alarm, the alarm must be cleared prior toremoval from the system. If the alarm cannot be cleared,remove the device from the system and push the hardreset on the CCM motherboard and RX/TX. Once thesystem is on-line insert the replacement device ontothe loop.

a. Identify the defective device to be replaced.b. Remove the defective device from the PC Line.c. Record the Model Number and Device Type.d. Ensure the new device is an exact replacement. Verify that

the Model Number is the same as the defective device.e. Set the address of the new device to the same as the de-

fective device using the procedure in Paragraph 2-8.6.f. Connect the new device to the PC Line where the defec-

tive device was removed, if not accomplished in the previ-ous step. Use the same detector base or electrical box ofthe defective device.

g. Perform the appropriate test listed below: Loop Device Test (Paragraph 4-3.2) for Detection De-

vices. Walk Test (Paragraph 4-3.4.2) for AI or AO.

August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

5-4

(THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)

August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

6-1

SYSTEMSPEGAsys Control Unit (includes CCM with One RX/TX Module, One Power Supply/ 76-100000-501 Charger Assembly and Enclosure)PEGAsys Multi-Loop Control Unit (includes CCM with One Multi-Loop 76-100000-600Motherboard One RX/TX Module, One P.S./Charger Assembly and Enclosure)MAIN SYSTEM COMPONENTSCentral Control Module (CCM), Single-loop 76-100008-501Central Control Module (CCM), Multi-loop 76-100008-600Power Supply/Charger Assembly, includes 4 Amp. P.S., Rev. C. 76-100009-010RX/TX Module for Single Loop System 76-100005-001RX/TX Module for Multi-Loop System 76-100005-002Main Enclosure 76-100000-502INPUT/OUTPUT MODULESAgent Release Module 76-100001-001Signal Output Module 76-100003-001Relay Output Module 76-100004-001City Tie Module 76-100002-001I/O Motherboard for 8 Option Modules 76-100007-001I/O Multi-Loop Motherboard for up to 8 RX/TX or 7 I/O modules 76-100017-001POWER SUPPLIESPower Supply Module, 4 Amp., including 36" Wiring Harness (for main cabinet) 76-100009-002Power Supply Module, 4 Amp., including 8" Wiring Harness (for expansion cabinet) 76-100009-003ADDITIONAL COMPONENTSPEGAsys Expansion Enclosure (order backplane separately) 76-100000-505Expansion Backplane, for Mounting Motherboard and 4 Power Supplies 76-100000-006Expansion Backplane, for Mounting 8 Power Supplies 76-100000-007Expansion Backplane, for Mounting two I/O Motherboards 76-100000-008Battery Enclosure for Additional Batteries 76-100010-001Battery 12V, 17AH 06-115915-046Battery 12V, 33AH 89-100052-001

CHAPTER 6PARTS LIST

6-1 INTRODUCTIONThe PEGAsys system parts list, Table 6-1 provides a list of allrepair parts.

NOMENCLATURE PART NUMBER

Table 6-1. PEGAsys System Parts List

August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

6-2

SMARTONE FIELD DEVICESIntelligent Photoelectric Detector, Model PSD-7152 71-402001-100

Intelligent Ionization Detector, Model CPD-7052 70-402001-100

Intelligent Thermal Detector, Model THD-7252 70-404001-100

6' Universal Detector Base, Model 6SB 70-400001-100

4' Universal Detector Base, Model 4SB 70-400001-101

Addressable Contact Input Device (N.O.) 70-407008-001

Addressable Contact Input Device (N.C.) 70-407008-002

Addressable Relay Output Device 70-408004-001

Loop Isolator - 1 Gang Box Mounted 74-200012-002

Loop Isolator - Detector Base Mounted 74-200012-004

Loop Isolator - RXTX Mounted 74-200012-001

DUCT HOUSING AND COMPONENTSDH-2000 Duct Housing without Detector Installed 70-403001-100

DH-2000 PSDI - Duct Housing with Photoelectric Detector Installed 70-403001-152

DH-2000 CPDI - Duct Housing with Ionization Detector Installed 70-403001-052

Sampling Tube - 12", The number of sampling holes vary with tube length. Order 06-129500-001sampling tubes that approximate duct width.

Sampling Tube - 24" 06-129500-002

Sampling Tube - 48" 06-129500-003

Sampling Tube - 72" 06-129500-004

Sampling Tube - 96" 06-129500-005

Sampling Tube - 120" 06-129500-006

Exhaust Tube Kit 06-129554-001

MISCELLANEOUSHandheld Device Programmer 74-200013-001

6-Conductor Telephone Cable with DB25 Adapter (DTE) for Computers and 74-100016-001Terminals

6-Conductor Telephone Cable with DB25 Adapter (DCE) for Modems 74-100016-002

6-Conductor Telephone Cable with DB9 Adapter (DTE) for Laptop Computers 74-100016-003

DB25 Adapter (DTE) for Computers and Terminals (use with 6-Conductor 06-129341-001Telephone Cable)

DB25 Adapter (DCE) for Modems (use with 6-Conductor Telephone Cable) 06-129317-003

DB9 Adapter (DTE) for Laptop Computer 06-129373-001

NOMENCLATURE PART NUMBER

Table 6-1. PEGAsys System Parts List (Continued)

August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

7-1

CHAPTER 7INSTALLATION

7-1 INTRODUCTIONThis chapter provides information necessary to install the PE-GAsys system. Installation consists of installing a complete sys-tem. The procedures in this chapter should be accomplishedby technicians familiar with fire alarm system installation andthe requirements of relevant NFPA regulations.

7-2 MATERIALS REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATIONThe materials listed below are not supplied with the system, butare required for installation. No. 10 or 1/4 inch Mounting Hardware Electrical Conduit for AC Input Power 4-inch Electrical Junction Boxes (as required) Wire-Nuts and Crimp-On Terminals (as required) Ground Strap (for use when handling printed circuit boards

7-3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR CENTRALCONTROL PANEL

The PEGAsys Central Control Panel enclosure is 28 inches highx 18 inches wide x 5½ inches deep. It is designed to be surfaceor semi-flush mounted using No. 10 or ¼ inch hardware. Thetype of hardware to be used is at the discretion of the installerbut must be in accordance with good electrical and safety prac-tices.

Figure 7-1 shows the enclosures mounting hole layout. Thelower set of mounting holes should typically be 44 inches fromthe floor in order that the display panel is at a convenient view-ing height.

To facilitate mounting the enclosure to its wall position, removethe enclosures front door. Be sure to disconnect the groundwire before removing the door.

To remove the front door, open the door approximately 90º fromits closed position and lift it up enough to allow the doors hingepins to clear their mating hinge sockets located on the left sideof the Central Control Panel.

Place the mounting screws in to the top two holes in the wall.Leave approximately 1/4 of both screws exposed. Carefullyplace the two key holes over the screws in the wall. Ensure theenclosure has its door hinge sockets located to the left as youface the enclosure. Allow the enclosure to gently come to reston the screws. Tighten the screws.

Figure 7-1. CCP Installation Drawing

With the enclosure held by the top two screws place the bottomtwo mounting screws in place. Tighten the screws. Reinstall theenclosure door at this time. Care must be taken when installingthe door to ensure that the hinge pins are lined up correctly.

7-4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOREXPANSION ENCLOSURES

The expansion enclosure (P/N 76-100000-505) uses a backplate installed in the enclosure to meet various system compo-nent requirements. The expansion enclosure maintains thesame outside dimensions as the main system enclosure. Thereare three versions of the backplate: An I/O module cardcage with mounting provisions for up to

4 power supplies Mounting provisions for up to eight power supplies Two motherboard cardcages for mounting up to 16 I/O mod-

ules in the expansion enclosure.The optional I/O motherboard and I/O modules must be installedprior to the system being powered up. The I/O bus (communi-cations) and 24 VDC power are attached to connectors locatedon the I/O Motherboard.

NOTE: The I/O Bus (RS-485) wiring must be enclosed inraceway from the main enclosure for a maximum runof 20 feet, with expansion enclosures located in thesame room as the main enclosure.

Figure 7-2, shows the expansion backplate which providesmounting for 4 power supplies and one I/O motherboard. Fig-

August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

7-2

ure 7-3 shows the expansion backplate which provides mount-ing for up to 8 auxiliary power supplies. Figure 7-4, shows theexpansion backplate which provides mounting for two I/O moth-erboards.

To install, position the back plate in the enclosure and fasten itto the seven studs located in the enclosure using the nuts sup-plied with the enclosure.

= Back Plate Mounting Studs (7 Locations)

06-1

29562-0

01

06-1

29562-0

01

NO

NO

NC

NC

RS485RS485

AB

CCMCCMMOTHER BDMOTHER BD

SYSTEM POWERSYSTEM POWER

24V

RETRET

24V

RETRET

24

V2

4V

RE

TR

ET

24

V2

4V

24

V2

4V

RE

TR

ET

RE

TR

ET

24

V2

4V

RE

TR

ET

BAT

+-

AU

X1

AU

X1

AU

X2

AU

X2

DC IN 2DC IN 2

C

DC

IN1

DC

IN1

AC

OU

TA

CO

UT

N1

L2

NG

LN

AC

INA

CIN

24V

L

SHR

RET

SH

RS

HR

TP4TP3

DS

1D

S1

S3

S3

TB9TB8

R R

211 2

S1

S1

ASHLAND, MA 01721ASHLAND, MA 01721KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.

RE

TR

ET

TBL RELAYTBL RELAYTBL RELAYTBL RELAYW2 W3

W4

W4

F1

W1

S2

S2

06-1

29562-0

01

06-1

29562-0

01

NO

NO

NC

NC

RS485RS485

AB

CCMCCMMOTHER BDMOTHER BD

SYSTEM POWERSYSTEM POWER

24V

RETRET

24V

RETRET

24

V2

4V

RE

TR

ET

24

V2

4V

24

V2

4V

RE

TR

ET

RE

TR

ET

24

V2

4V

RE

TR

ET

BAT

+-

AU

X1

AU

X1

AU

X2

AU

X2

DC IN 2DC IN 2

C

DC

IN1

DC

IN1

AC

OU

TA

CO

UT

N1

L2

NG

LN

AC

INA

CIN

24V

L

SHR

RET

SH

RS

HR

TP4TP3

DS

1D

S1

S3

S3

TB9TB8

R R

211 2

S1

S1

ASHLAND, MA 01721ASHLAND, MA 01721KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.

RE

TR

ET

TBL RELAYTBL RELAYTBL RELAYTBL RELAYW2 W3

W4

W4

F1

W1

S2

S2

Figure 7-2. Back Plate, I/O Motherboard & 4 P.S.

= Back Plate Mounting Studs (7 Locations)

06-1

29562-0

01

06-1

29562-0

01

NO

NO

NC

NC

RS485

AB

CCMMOTHER BDMOTHER BD

SYSTEM POWERSYSTEM POWER

24V

RETRET

24V24V

RETRET

24

V2

4V

RE

TR

ET

24

V2

4V

24

V2

4V

RE

TR

ET

RE

TR

ET

24

V2

4V

RE

TR

ET

BAT

+-

AU

X1

AU

X1

AU

X2

AU

X2

DC IN 2DC IN 2

C

DC

IN1

DC

IN1

AC

OU

TA

CO

UT

N1

L2

NG

LN

AC

INA

CIN

24V

L

SHR

RETRET

SH

RS

HR

TP4TP3

DS

1D

S1

S3

S3

TB9TB8

R R

211 2

S1

S1

ASHLAND, MA 01721ASHLAND, MA 01721KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.

RE

TR

ET

TBL RELAYTBL RELAYTBL RELAYTBL RELAYW2 W3

W4

W4

F1

W1

S2

S2

06-1

29562-0

01

06-1

29562-0

01

NO

NO

NC

NC

RS485

AB

CCMMOTHER BDMOTHER BD

SYSTEM POWERSYSTEM POWER

24V

RETRET

24V

RETRET

24

V2

4V

RE

TR

ET

24

V2

4V

24

V2

4V

RE

TR

ET

RE

TR

ET

24

V2

4V

RE

TR

ET

BAT

+-

AU

X1

AU

X1

AU

X2

AU

X2

DC IN 2DC IN 2

C

DC

IN1

DC

IN1

AC

OU

TA

CO

UT

N1

L2

NG

LN

AC

INA

CIN

24V

L

SHRSHR

RETRET

SH

RS

HR

TP4TP3

DS

1D

S1

S3

S3

TB9TB8

R R

211 2

S1

S1

ASHLAND, MA 01721ASHLAND, MA 01721KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.

RE

TR

ET

TBL RELAYTBL RELAYTBL RELAYTBL RELAYW2 W3

W4

W4

F1

W1

S2

S2

06-1

29562-0

01

06-1

29562-0

01

NO

NO

NC

NC

RS485

AB

CCMMOTHER BDMOTHER BD

SYSTEM POWERSYSTEM POWER

24V

RETRET

24V24V

RETRET

24

V2

4V

RE

TR

ET

24

V2

4V

24

V2

4V

RE

TR

ET

RE

TR

ET

24

V2

4V

RE

TR

ET

BAT

+-

AU

X1

AU

X1

AU

X2

AU

X2

DC IN 2DC IN 2

C

DC

IN1

DC

IN1

AC

OU

TA

CO

UT

N1

L2

NG

LN

AC

INA

CIN

24V

L

SHR

RETRET

SH

RS

HR

TP4TP3

DS

1D

S1

S3

S3

TB9TB8

R R

211 2

S1

S1

ASHLAND, MA 01721ASHLAND, MA 01721KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.

RE

TR

ET

TBL RELAYTBL RELAYTBL RELAYTBL RELAYW2 W3

W4

W4

F1

W1

S2

S2

06-1

29562-0

01

06-1

29562-0

01

NO

NO

NC

NC

RS485

AB

CCMMOTHER BDMOTHER BD

SYSTEM POWERSYSTEM POWER

24V

RETRET

24V

RETRET

24

V2

4V

RE

TR

ET

24

V2

4V

24

V2

4V

RE

TR

ET

RE

TR

ET

24

V2

4V

RE

TR

ET

BAT

+-

AU

X1

AU

X1

AU

X2

AU

X2

DC IN 2DC IN 2

C

DC

IN1

DC

IN1

AC

OU

TA

CO

UT

N1

L2

NG

LN

AC

INA

CIN

24V

L

SHRSHR

RETRET

SH

RS

HR

TP4TP3

DS

1D

S1

S3

S3

TB9TB8

R R

211 2

S1

S1

ASHLAND, MA 01721ASHLAND, MA 01721KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.

RE

TR

ET

TBL RELAYTBL RELAYTBL RELAYTBL RELAYW2 W3

W4

W4

F1

W1

S2

S2

Figure 7-3. Back Plate, 8 P.S.

= Back Plate Mounting Studs (7 Locations)

Figure 7-4. Back Plate, 2 I/O Motherboard

7-5 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR I/OMOTHERBOARD

The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedureto install a I/O motherboard into a single loop configured sys-tem.a. Place motherboard on standoffs in the back of the enclo-

sure.b. Insert and tighten the 12 mounting screws provided with

the motherboard.c. Connect the 24VDC wiring from the power supply to termi-

nal TB1.d. Connect the RJ-12 phone style wire from the MOTHER BD

connector (on the power supply) to J9 on the motherboard.

7-6 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR RX/TXMODULE (MULTI-LOOP ONLY)

The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedurefor replacing the RX/TX module. Refer to Figure 7-5.

Ensure the RX/TX jumpers are set properly during the proce-dure. Verify that the settings of the jumpers on the RX/TX Mod-ule conform to the wiring style of the system being installed.The RX/TX is shipped from the factory programmed for Style 6wiring style. Refer to Drawing No. 06-235443-002, in AppendixI, which is the installation drawing which shows the jumper lo-cations on the RX/TX module. The settings are used to set thewiring style ( 4, 6 or 7), 7 being used with loop isolators. Jump-ers on the RX/TX Module are noted by JP x and Wx (x = asingle digit) call-outs on the module board. Table 7-1 lists thetypes of allowable configurations you can select along with theirrespective jumpers.

August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

7-3

Figure 7-5. Installation for Multi-Loop

Table 7-1 RX/TX Configuration Selection

repmuJ 4elytS 6elytS6elytSpooL/WrotalosI

7elytS

2W&1W nepO detrohS detrohS detrohS

2PJ detrohS detrohS nepO nepO

3PJ detrohS detrohS nepO nepO

NOTE: Style seven (7) requires the use of loop isolators, theRX/TX module requires the use of one (1) P/N 74-200012-001 isolator module to operate in the Style 7configuration.

a. Remove RX/TX module from packing and inspect for physi-cal damage.

b. Ensure jumper configuration is set. Refer to Table 7-1 set-ting per wiring style used.

c. Install loop isolator, P/N 74-200012-001, if used.d. Connect 24VDC wiring from terminal block (TB1-TB8) to

24VDC input plug J1. The terminal block which will be usedto power the RX/TX will be dependant upon which slot theRX/TX will be installed into.

e. Install the short 6 conductor cable from the RS-232 port onthe RX/TX to either RJ12 sockets JP1-JP8. The socket se-lected is dependant upon which slot the RX/TX will be in-stalled into.

f. Place the RX/TX against the mounting bracket, in the PE-GAsys, over the desired slot to be placed in. Install the twomounting screws and tighten until snug.

g. Removal of the RX/TX would be in the reverse order.

NOTE: Since the RX/TX's are not addressed by switches theslot that they are installed in will become there address.Example: A RX/TX installed in JP1 on the multi-loopmotherboard will become RX/TX 1, Loop 1. If the sameRX/TX was changed into JP4, the address wouldbecome RX/TX 4, Loop 4.

7-7 INSTALLATION OF I/O MODULESThe I/O modules can be inserted into the motherboard in anyorder. The CCM automatically reads the I/O modules type andaddress upon registration. However, it is recommended that youinsert modules performing like functions adjacent to each otherto facilitate identification and field wiring runs. After poweringup the system, you can request a list of I/O Module assign-ments from the system menu to verify their registration and ac-curacy of module address(s).

CAUTION

All personnel installing or servicing PEGAsys equip-ment must wear a grounding strap when workingin the Central Control panel to avoid generatingstatic electricity which can destroy integrated cir-cuits. Input / Output Module printed circuit boardsare shipped in anti-static plastic bags and shouldbe kept in these bags until you are ready to installthem. When you remove these circuit boards fromthe Motherboard, they should be replaced in to theappropriate bags. NEVER PACK THESE BOARDSIN STYROFOAM OR PLASTIC PELLETS.

WARNING

Input/Output Modules should never be installed ina powered-up system. Always disconnect bothAC and battery power before installing or remov-ing I/O Modules.

To remove a I/O module from the system; secure power, re-move terminal block from module, remove the two mountingscrews and pull out the module.

The following paragraphs describe the installation procedurefor each available I/O module type.

7-7.1 Signal Audible Output ModuleThe following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure toinstall a signal audible output module into the PEGAsys system.a. Remove the signal audible output module from packing and

inspect for physical damage.b. Set address switches. Refer to drawing 06-235371-006 in

Appendix I for address switch settings.c. Set jumpers W1-W3 for appropriate Y/Z wiring styles (refer

to Drawing No. 06-235443-006 in the back of the manualfor jumper settings).

d. Cut jumper between W9 & W10 if using an auxiliary 24VDCpower input.

e. Install module onto the motherboard. Ensure the connec-tor mates properly.

f. Insert and tighten mounting screws. Refer to appropriateFigure 5-1 or 5-2.

August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

7-4

7-7.2 Relay Output ModuleThe following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedureto install a relay output module into the PEGAsys system.a. Remove the relay output module from packing and inspect

for physical damage.b. Set address switches. Refer to Drawing No. 06-235443-

007 in Appendix I for address switch settings.c. Install module onto the motherboard. Ensure the connec-

tor mates properly.d. Insert and tighten mounting screws. Refer to appropriate

Figure 5-1 or 5-2.

7-7.3 Agent Release ModuleThe following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedureto install a agent release module into the PEGAsys system.

a. Remove the agent release module from packing andinspect for physical damage.

b. Set address switches. Refer to drawing 06-235443-005 in Appendix I for address switch settings.

c. Set switches S3 & S4 for solenoid or initiator activa-tion (refer to drawing 06-235443-005 in the back of themanual for switch settings).

d. Cut jumper between W1 & W2 if using an auxiliary24VDC power input.

e. Install module onto the motherboard. Ensure the con-nector mates properly.

f. Insert and tighten mounting screws. Refer to appropri-ate Figure 5-1 or 5-2.

7-7.4 City-Tie Output ModuleThe following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedureto install a city tie output module into the PEGAsys system.a. Remove the agent release module from packing and in-

spect for physical damage.b. Set module configuration. Refer to drawing 06-235443-008

in Appendix I.c. Install module on the motherboard. Ensure the connector

mates properly.d. Insert and tighten mounting screws. Refer to appropriate

Figure 5-1 or 5-2.

7-7.6 Power Supply/Charger AssemblyThe following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedureto install a power supply/charger assembly into the PEGAsyssystem.a. Remove the power supply/charger assembly from packing

and inspect for physical damage.b. Set address switches. Refer to drawing 06-235443-003 in

Appendix I for address switch settings.c. Identify module revision by referring to Figures 3-5 and 3-

6.d. Ensure the wiring connections between the switching power

supply (Aux. Power Supply) and monitor module (MainPower Supply) are accomplished in accordance with theappropriate Figure, Figure 7-6 or 7-7.

e. Set jumpers in accordance with Drawing No. 06-235443-003 (located in the back of this manual).

f. Install module in the desired position on the back plate ofthe main or extension enclosure.

g. Insert and tighten the four mounting screws/nuts into thefour corners of the mounting plate.

7-7.7 Power Supply/Charger Assembly, ExpansionEnclosure

The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedureto install a power supply/charger assembly into the expansionenclosure.a. Remove the power supply/charger assembly from packing

and inspect for physical damage.b. Set address switches. Refer to Drawing No. 06-235443-

003 in Appendix I for address switch settings.c. Identify module revision by referring to Figures 3-5 and 3-

6.d. Ensure the wiring connections between the switching power

supply (Aux. Power Supply) and monitor module (MainPower Supply) are accomplished in accordance with theappropriate Figure, Figure 7-8 or 7-9.

attribute? attribute? attribute? attribute? attribute? attribute? attribute? attribute? attribute? attribute?

AC OUT1

AC IN2

24V

RE

T

N L N L N

DC IN 1

LG

SP

V

attribute

?attribute

?attribute

?attribute

?

24V

RET

DC

IN2

SHARE

WHT

BLK/WHT

BLKBLK

REDREDORN

WHT

BLK/WHT

ORN

RED

BLKBLK

RED

MAIN POWER SUPPLY(76-100009-001)

AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY(76-100009-002)

RET

Figure 7-6. Power Supply/Charger (Rev A), Wiring Diagram

August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

7-5

attribute? attribute? attribute? attribute? attribute? attribute? attribute? attribute?attribute? attribute?attribute? attribute? attribute? attribute?

24V

RE

T

AC OUT1

AC IN2

24

V

RE

T

N L N L N

DC IN 1

L G

DC IN 2

SP

V

SP

V

SH

AR

E

WHT

BLK/WHT

BLKBLK

VIOREDREDORN

WHT

BLK/WHT

ORN

RED

BLK

VIO

BLK

RED

MAIN POWER SUPPLY(76-100009-010)

AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY(76-100009-002)

Figure 7-7. Power Supply/Charger (Rev C), Wiring Diagrame. Set jumpers in accordance with drawing 06-235443-003

(located in the back of this manual).f. Install module in the desired position on the back plate of

the expansion enclosure.

g. Insert and tighten the four mounting screws into the fourcorners of the mounting plate.

Table 7-2. Aux. Power Supply Module Connections to Rev A,Main Power Supply/Charger Assembly

rewoP.xuAylppuS

noitcnuF ylppuSniaM

etihW )lartueN(tupniCA )N(31BT

etihW/kcalB )toH(tupnICA )L(31BT

deR ).soP(tuptuOCD )CDV42(9BT

kcalB ).geN(tuptuOCD )teR(8BT

egnarO erahS )RHS(9BT

Table 7-3. Aux. Power Supply Module Connections to Rev C,Main Power Supply/Charger Assembly

ylppuSrewoP.xuA noitcnuF ylppuSniaM

etihW )lartueN(tupniCA )N(31BT

etihW/kcalB )toH(tupnICA )L(31BT

deR ).soP(tuptuOCD )CDV42(9BT

kcalB ).geN(tuptuOCD )teR(8BT

teloiV noisivrepuS )VPS(8BT

egnarO erahS )RHS(9BT

Figure 7-8. Power Supply/Charger (Rev A), Wiring Diagram for Expansion Enclosure

Figure 7-9. Power Supply/Charger (Rev C), Wiring Diagram for Expansion Enclosure

WHT

BLK/WHT

BLKBLK

RED

REDORN

attrib

ute

?a

ttrib

ute

?a

ttrib

ute

?a

ttrib

ute

?a

ttrib

ute

?a

ttrib

ute

?a

ttrib

ute

?a

ttrib

ute

?a

ttrib

ute

?a

ttrib

ute

?

AC

OU

T1

AC

IN2

24V

RET

NL

NL

N

DC

IN1

LG

SPV

attribute ?attribute ? attribute ?attribute ?24V

RE

T

DCIN2

SH

AR

E

MAIN POWER SUPPLY(76-100009-001)

AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY(76-100009-003)

RE

T

WHT

BLK/WHT

BLKBLK

VIO

REDRED

ORN

att

ribute

?

att

rib

ute

?

att

ribute

?

att

rib

ute

?

att

ribute

?

att

rib

ute

?

att

ribute

?

att

rib

ute

?

att

ribute

?

att

rib

ute

?

att

ribute

?

att

rib

ute

?

att

ribute

?

att

rib

ute

?

24V

RET

AC

OU

T1

AC

IN2

24V

RET

NL

NL

N

DC

IN1

LG

DC

IN2

SPV

SPV

SHARE

MAIN POWER SUPPLY(76-100009-010)

AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY(76-100009-003)

August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

7-6

7-7.8. Power Supply Communication ConnectionsBoth Rev. A & C communicate with the CCM over the I/O bus ofthe PEGAsys system. To that end, there are different ways ofconnecting these components. The power supply unit in themain enclosure of the PEGAsys system communicates with theCCM over a short phone style cable. The I/O bus extends out ofthe power supply when needed, i.e., a motherboard installed orother power supplies installed in expansion enclosure without amotherboard. These two examples are accomplished as fol-lows:1. Power supply in main enclosure to motherboard in main

enclosure; A flat six conductor phone type cable is attachedto CON 2 of power supply and then inserted into the RJ-12 jack on the motherboard labeled I/O buss. Removejumper W4 to enable the terminating resistor on the moth-erboard, the terminating resistor is used to balance the RS-485 communications.

2. Power supplies installed in expansion enclosure without amotherboard can use the RS-485 terminal block (TB1). Thisconnection allows the installer to connect a twisted pairAWG-18 cable to terminals A & B of TB1 on the powersupply in the main enclosure and connect to the same ter-minals on the power supply in the expansion enclosure, asshown in the following diagram. This connection must bedaisy chained to other power supplies in the expansion en-closure, if installed. Jumper W4 must be removed from allpower supplies in line except the last power supply unit inthe expansion enclosure. This will maintain the terminatingresistor at the end of the RS-485 circuit, which is requiredto ensure proper operation of the RS-485 communications.

7-8 CONNECTING AC POWERAC power must be provided to the Central Control Panels in-ternal power supply using three conductors. The AC power cableis to be run through a conduit from a dedicated, 15 amp circuitbreaker. The conduit must be attached to the right side of theCentral Control Panel enclosure through one of the knockoutsnear the upper right corner of the enclosure.

See Appendix A for AC branch circuit requirements details.

WARNING

High voltages may be present when connecting ACpower to the Central Control Panel. Suitable pre-cautions must be taken to avoid injury.

NOTE: All Non-Power-Limited wiring must be routed away fromPower Limited wiring by a minimum of 1/4", per NFPA& UL requirements. For Power Limited Circuits useType FPL, FPLP, or FPLR cable per NEC Article 760.

Insure that the circuit breaker at the dedicated AC power sourceis in the OFF position. Attach the three AC power conductors toTB1 on the Central Control Panels power supply PCB as shownon drawing No. 06-235443-003, in Appendix I.

7-9 INSTALL AND CONNECT DC POWERSpace is provided within the Central Control Panel for two 12V33AH sealed lead acid batteries used for 24 hour standby op-eration.

7-9.1 Battery EnclosureA separate UL Listed battery enclosure, shown in Figure 7-10,(P/N 76-100010-001) is used to house up to two 12V, 40AH,sealed lead-acid batteries. The enclosure is designed to be sur-face mounted using only hardware similar to that used on theCCP (See Paragraph 7-3) and must be mounted within 100 feetof the panel.

NOTE: Wiring for the batteries to the power supply must besized accordingly to prevent unacceptable voltagedrops.

7-9.2 BatteriesRefer to Appendix A for required system power calculations.Refer to Appendix E for FM Pre-Action/Deluge sprinkler require-ments for 90-hour standby periods.

Recommended battery manufacturers and models are:

StandbyTime Battery

24 Hours Panasonic LCR 12V 17AP,17 AH(P/N 06-115915-046)

60 Hours Power Sonic 12330, 33 AH (2 sets)(P/N 89-100052-001)

90 Hours Power Sonic 12330, 33 AH (3 sets)(P/N 89-100052-001)

The batteries should be rated for standby power use and fitwithin the physical dimensions of the respective enclosure. Thebatteries must have terminals that accept standard ring-typesolderless connectors.

CAUTION

Do not connect the batteries to the systems powersupply at this time. Connect the batteries at the endof the system's installation.

Connection to the power supply must be according to drawing06-235443-003, in Appendix I.

August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

7-7

Figure 7-10. Battery Enclosure

7-10 FIELD DEVICE CONNECTION TO RX/TXMODULE

Field devices connect to terminal block (TB1) located on thePEGAsys Systems Receiver/Transmitter (RX/TX). The cableconnecting the field devices to the RX/TX module provides powerand bidirectional communications to the loop devices. One RX/TX module can support up to 255 SmartOne addressable fielddevices. These 255 addresses can be any mixture of intelligentloop device inputs and outputs without restriction to amounts ofeither inputs or outputs.

NOTE: All Non Power Limited wiring must be routed away fromPower Limited wiring by a minimum of 1/4", per NFPA& UL requirements. For Power Limited Circuits useType FPL, FPLP, or FPLR cable per NEC Article 760.

7-10.1 Wiring the RX/TX PC LineThe RX/TX PC line uses Broadcast Indexing Protocol (BIP) forcommunications with intelligent loop devices. The PC Line maybe configured in NFPA-72, Style 4, 6, or 7. The PC Line is ca-pable of supporting 255 intelligent loop devices on a 2-wire loop.

In retrofit applications, existing wiring can be used as long as itmeets NEC 760 and NFPA 72 requirements. When installingnew wiring or using existing wiring it is necessary to check lineresistance and capacitance. Total line resistance can not begreater than 26 Ohms, and capacitance can not exceed 1.0microFarad. Kidde recommends that you use No. 18 AWG mini-mum wiring as the connection cable between the RX/TX Mod-ule and the field devices

The PC line to the loop devices can be run in conduit to theCentral Control Panel cabinet. The conduit, if used must beattached through any convenient Central Control Panel enclo-sure knockout. Route the connection cable to TB1 on the RX/TX PCB, and insert the end of each connection cable wire intoits proper TB1 slot and tighten the slot screws firmly. See Fig-ure 7-11.

In retrofit applications where the PC line of the RX/TX may bemixed in an existing conduit with appropriately loaded output

circuits (signal & release), using unshielded cable for all cir-cuits is only recommended when all output devices connectedare Kidde products. All conduit and conductors must meet NEC,NFPA-72 and any applicable local code requirements. See Fig-ure 7-12 for shielded cable termination. Optionally, the PC linecan be installed in a separate conduit as shown previously, thusallowing the PC line to remain straight lay wire.

Figure 7-11. Conduit to CCP

Figure 7-12. Shielded Wire to CCP

NOTE: All new RCUs are shipped from Kidde with their addressset to 000. This address is reserved for unregistereddevices and cannot be used as a registered address.You must connect unaddressed devices to the RX/TXModule one at a time in order to address them.Otherwise you may pre address devices using the handheld device programmer (P/N 74-200013-001) andconnect multiple pre-addressed loop devices to the RX/TX PC line at the same time.

Table 7-1 lists the types of allowable configurations you canselect along with the respective jumper settings for those con-figurations. As described in this chapter the PC line can be con-figured in Style 4, 6, or 7. Each Style is represented in Figures7-13 through 7-16.

Style 4 configurations allow T-tapping. T-tapping is only limitedby sound installation techniques.

August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

7-8

Figure 7-13. Style 4, RX/TX PC Line Connections

In the Style 6 wiring, configuration the RX/TX automatically trans-mits data and power bidirectionally when a break in the PC linewiring occurs. If the break is in a single conductor, all loop de-vices will remain fully operational. For Style 6 PC line connec-tions, if a PC line open trouble is encountered, use the systemreset switch on the display and control board, or push the bot-tom button on the RX/TX board, to reset the PC line to normalonce the fault is corrected.

Figure 7-14. Style 6, RX/TX PC Line Connections

Loop Isolator devices are available to support NFPA-72 WiringStyle 7 and would be installed on the PC line of the RX/TX mod-ule. Isolator packages are available for electrical box mount(Single Gang), 6 Base mount and RX/TX mount.

By "flanking" each group of loop devices with a pair of loopisolators, each zone is protected from opens and shorts. A zoneis defined as a group of loop devices. In this style of installa-tion, a short circuit between any two loop isolators will not effectany other zone. The isolators on each side of the short will openthe PC line.

August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

7-9

Figure 7-15. Style 6, RX/TX PC Line Connections with LoopIsolators

Figure 7-16 and the RX/TX Module Installation Wiring Diagram(Dwg. No. 06-235443-002), located in the back of this manual,depicts a typical NFPA Style 7 installation.

NOTE: The maximum number of loop devices that can beconnected between loop isolators is 30. During a shortcircuit fault condition, the control panel will register atrouble condition for each device located between thetwo affected loop isolators.

Figure 7-16. Style 7, RX/TX PC Line Connection

7-11 OUTPUT SIGNAL CONNECTIONThe PEGAsys System provides output signals to drive alarmdevices and communicate with central stations and controlequipment. These outputs are provided on the CCM and op-tional I/O modules.

Each connection cable to output devices is to be run from theoutput device circuit to the Central Control Panel. The cablemust be brought through any convenient Central Control Panelenclosure knockout. Route each connection cable to the termi-nal block located on the respective Output Module, insert theend of each connection cable wire into its proper terminal blockslot, and tighten the slot screws firmly.

Instructions for connecting output devices are provided on theirrespective Installation Wiring Diagrams located in the Appen-dix I of this manual. Refer to the respective manufacturers lit-erature for specific installation instructions of output devices.

NOTE: All Non Power Limited wiring must be routed away fromPower Limited wiring by a minimum of 1/4", per NFPA& UL requirements. For Power Limited Circuits useType FPL, FPLP, or FPLR cable per NEC Article 760.

August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

7-10

7-12 EXTERNAL POWER FAILURE INDICATORCONNECTION

The PEGAsys System provides a 2 A @ 30 VDC SPDT relay onthe power supply control unit that de-energizes (normally pow-ered) in the event of a power supply monitor trouble - troublesinclude: AC Power Failure 24 VDC Power Supply Failure Battery Failure Ground Fault Communications FailureThe power supply trouble relay is normally powered so that inthe event of power failure the relay will transfer to the normallyclosed position. The contact can be used to signal an externalpower supply trouble indicator.

The connection cable to an external power supply trouble indi-cating device is to be run through a conduit from the indicatingdevice to the Central Control Panel. The conduit must be at-tached to any convenient Central Control Panel enclosure knock-out. Connect cable to TB1 on the Central Control Panels powersupply PCB as shown in Figure 3-6.

7-13 DETECTOR INSTALLATIONRefer to the SmartOne Smoke and Heat Detector InstallationSheet (74-212) for installation instructions. Also, refer to Chap-ter 2, Paragraph 2-8.6 for setting addresses and registeringRCUs.

7-14 SETTING AND ADJUSTING SMOKE & HEATDETECTOR SENSITIVITIES

Setting the sensitivity of SmartOne ionization and photoelectricsmoke detectors and heat detectors is accomplished by settingthe threshold alarm and pre-alarm smoke density levels. TheSmartOne smoke detectors (Ionization and Photoelectric) werepreviously programmed for a device application during the reg-istration process.

The smoke detectors have specific sensitivities for particularapplications. There are 3 applications which represent the ma-jority of detector use: Open Area, Open Area (High AirFlow)and Duct.

The sensitivity adjustment is accomplished in one of two ways:

1. Smoke & Heat Detector Configuration. During theprocess of configuring the system using the PCS program, theoperator selects the application of the detector and adjusts thesettings of the alarm and pre-alarm values within the range forthe application chosen, or accept the default values for the ap-plication.

2. Level Setting Operation. This procedure is selectedfrom the menus. This method is generally used for systemswhich have been installed and operational for a period of time.It should only be used if there is a need to change the sensitiv-ity of the device.

7-14.1 Setting and Adjusting Smoke and HeatDetector Sensitivity Procedure

The step-by-step procedure to perform the setting sensitivitytest follows:a. Access the PEGAsys system menus by:

(1) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:

PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD(2) Type in the Level 2 password.

(3) Press the return (↵ ) key. Verify that the displayreads:

1:ISOLATE 2:LIST3:SET 4:TEST

b. Select the Detector Sensitivity by typing in 3-3-2. Verify thatthe display reads:

1:IONIZATION 2:PHOTOELECTRIC3:THERMAL (<) to return

c. Select the desired detector style which is to have its sensi-tivity adjusted. After type selection, the system display:

SET DETECTOR SENSITIVITYDETECTORS FROM _ _ _ _ TO _ _ _ _

NOTE: The user would enter the address range of thedetectors to be adjusted. The range can be from 1 to255. The system will adjust the sensitivity of all thespecified type of detectors which were previouslychosen (Ion, Photo or Heat) within the range.

d. Press the return pushbutton and the display will read:

SET DETECTOR SENSITIVITYPREALARM _._ (0.2 -3.0 / FT)

TOLERANCE RANGES

Device Open Area High Velocity

Ionization 0.5 - 1.5%/FT 0.5 -1.0 %/FT

Photoelectric 0.2 - 3.5 %/FT 0.2 - 2.0 %/FT

Device 50-FT spacing 70-FT Spacing

Thermal 80° - 155° F 80° - 145° F

e. This prompt asks the user for the Pre-alarm level for thedetector(s) to be set. Key in the desired pre alarm leveland press the return key. After pressing return the displaywill read:

SET DETECTOR SENSITIVITYALARM _._ (0.5 -3.0 / FT)

TOLERANCE RANGE

Device Open Area High Velocity

Ionization 0.5 - 1.5%/FT 0.5 -1.0 %/FT

Photoelectric 0.5 - 3.5 %/FT 0.5 - 2.0 %/FT

August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

7-11

Device 50-FT spacing 70-FT Spacing

Thermal 135° - 155° F 135° - 145° F

f. This prompt asks the user for the alarm level for thedetector(s) to be set. Key in the desired alarm level andpress the return key. After pressing return the display willread:

LEVELS SET ON XX DETECTORSg. This message verifies that the desired sensitivity adjust-

ments were done on XX amount of detectors. The sensitiv-ity of all specified detectors (depending on which type waspreviously selected) will be set in the previous procedure.

7-15 ADDRESSABLE CONTACT INPUT DEVICEINSTALLATION

The Addressable Contact Input Devices are designed to be in-stalled in a North American 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) deep one-gangbox, or a standard 4 in. square box 1-1/2 (38 mm) deep with aone-gang blank cover. The AI terminal block will accept #14,#16, and #18 AWG wire (1.5, 1.0, and 0.75 mm2 respectively)with size #18 being a minimum requirement. Refer to the wiringthe diagram in Appendix I for specific connection information.Also refer to Chapter 2, Paragraphs 2-8.6 and 2-8.7 for settingaddresses and other parameters. The installation must complywith national and local electrical codes.

7-16 ADDRESSABLE RELAY OUTPUT DEVICEINSTALLATION

The Addressable Contact Output Devices are designed to beinstalled in a North American 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) deep one-gangbox, or a standard 4 in. square box 1-1/2 (38 mm) deep with aone-gang blank cover. The AI terminal block will accept #14,#16, and #18 AWG wire (1.5, 1.0, and 0.75 mm2 respectively)with size #18 being a minimum requirement. Refer to drawingnumber 06-234563-001 located in Appendix I, for specific con-nection information on both devices. Also, refer to Chapter 2,Paragraphs 2-8.6 and 2-8.7 for setting addresses and otherparameters. The installation must comply with national and lo-cal electrical codes.

NOTE: All Non Power Limited wiring must be routed away fromPower Limited wiring by a minimum of 1/4", per NFPA& UL requirements. For Power Limited Circuits useType FPL, FPLP, or FPLR cable per NEC Article 760.

7-17 INSTALLATION CHECKOUTBefore powering up the PEGAsys for the first time, ensure thatthe following has been completed:a. Central Control Module (CCM), RX/TX Module and System

Power Supply are secured to the back of the enclosure.b. CCM is connected to the RX/TX Module, Display Assem-

bly, System Power Supply (I/O bus and 24 VDC), and Re-mote RS-232 peripheral(s) if any.

c. CCMs configuration jumpers configured correctly to insureproper operation of the programmable (signal / release)output (MP1).

d. Optional Motherboard if installed, is connected to the CCM(I/O bus) and System Power Supply (24 VDC).

e. RX/TX Module is connected to the CCM (RJ-12) and sys-tem power supply (24 VDC).

f. Output Modules if used, are installed in the Motherboard,addressed correctly, configured for appropriate mode of op-eration and their external wiring is connected correctly.

g. Perform the Power-Up procedure in Chapter 4, Paragraph4-5.

h. Refer to Chapter 2 for system operations and programming.

7-18 CONNECTION OF PERIPHERALSThe following paragraphs will describe how to connect a termi-nal or personal computer and a printer.

7-18.1 Connecting a Terminal or Personal ComputerA UL Listed EDP terminal or computer can be connected to thesystems RS-232 port. A 6-wire RJ-12 type modular phone jack(PC port), located on the CCM, provides easy connection.

The terminal or computer connection cable must have a RJ-12type modular phone plug that connects to the CCM (use P/N74-100016-003, for a DB9 connector for laptops, or P/N 74-100016-001 for a DB25 connector for personal computers). Theconnector at the terminal end must be of the type required bythe terminal device. Route the connection cable to one of theRS-232 modular plug into the jack until it snaps into place. Theterminal or computer must be located in the same room as theCentral Control Panel.

The parameters and connections for the RS-232 printer portare as follows:

PARAMETERS9600 Baud8 Data Bits1 Stop BitNo Parity

NOTE: These parameters are fixed and not adjustable.

PIN and FUNCTION1 TX2 Signal Ground3 RTS4 CTS5 N/C6 RX

7-18.2 Connecting a PrinterThe RS-232 printer port of the CCM is a supervised connec-tion. The installer must enable the printer port for operation.The enabling or disabling of the printer port would be done byaccessing the 1st or 2nd level menu.

August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

7-12

A simple connection cable is all that is needed to connect theserial printer to the RS-232 port of the CCM. The following dia-gram represents the cable.

CCM PIN PRINTERTX 1. RX (receive data)Sig. Gnd. 2. Sig. Gnd.RTS 3.CTS* 4. DTR*N/C 5.RX 6.

* +8 to +12 VDC signal needed for supervision if using a graphicannunciator.

Figure 7-17. CCM Printer Port

A-1 August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

APPENDIX APOWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS

A-1 AC BRANCH CIRCUITThe PEGAsys fire alarm/suppression control system requires connection to a separate dedicated AC branch circuit (120 or 240VAC), which must be labeled FIRE ALARM. This branch circuit must connect to the line side of the main power feed of the protectedpremises. No other equipment may be powered from the fire-alarm branch circuit. The branch circuit wire must run continuously,without any disconnect devices, from the power source to the fire alarm/suppression control panel. When multiple power supplies areinstalled in the system enclosure(s) they must all be fed from the same circuit. Over-current protection for this circuit must comply withArticle 760 of the National Electric Code, NFPA-72 as well as applicable local codes. Use a minimum of # 14 AWG with 600-voltinsulation for this branch circuit.

Table A-1: AC Branch Circuit Requirements (120 VAC)

epyTeciveDforebmuN

seciveDwarDtnerruC

)spmA(tnerruClatoT

eciveDrep

lenaPlortnoC 1 X 9.1 = 9.1

rewoPyrailixuAroylppuS

eludoM)( X 9.1 =

rofnmulocmuShcnarBCA

deriuqertnerruC= spmA

NOTE: Each main power supply and power supply module added to the system would increase the AC requirementby 1.9 Amps (max.)

Table A-2: AC Branch Circuit Requirements (220 VAC)

epyTeciveDforebmuN

seciveDwarDtnerruC

)spmA(tnerruClatoT

eciveDrep

lenaPlortnoC 1 X 59.0 = 59.0

rewoPyrailixuAylppus

)( X 59.0 =

rofnmulocmuShcnarBCA

deriuqertnerruC= spmA

NOTE: Each main power supply and power supply module added to the system would increase the AC requirementby 0.95 Amps (max.)

A-2August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

A-2 SYSTEM STANDBY POWER REQUIREMENTSThe control panel provides regulated power for operating external devices, system operation, and standby battery charging. Thepower for operating external devices is expandable. When using additional main power supplies in expansion cabinets, each supplymust be evaluated for its loading in the same way as the primary power supply in the main cabinet.

NOTE: Use Table A3 (Standby or non-alarm) to determine main system power supply and any installed auxiliary power modulestandby current requirements.

Table A-3: Standby Power Requirements (24 VDC)

eciveD/eludoMybdnatS

)spmA(tnerruC/eludoM

metsyS

mumixaMybdnatS

)spmA(tnerruC

eludoMlortnoClartneC 070.0 X 1 = 070.0

eludomXTXR 530.0 X =

rotinoMylppusrewoP 060.0 X =

eeS(A5.1xaM,1tuptuOyrailixuA)2&1setoN

X =

eeS(A5.1xaM,2tuptuOyrailixuA)2&1setoN

X =

draoBrehtoMpooL-itluM 530.0 X =

eludoMtuptuOelbiduAlangiS 520.0 X =

eludoMtuptuOyaleR 010.0 X =

eludoMtuptuOeiTytiC 030.0 X =

eludoMtuptuOesaeleRtnegA 560.0 X =

SECIVEDDLEIF X =

rotceteDnoitazinoI 004000.0 X =

rotceteDcirtceleotohP 504000.0 X =

tupnItcatnoCelbasserddA 013000.0 X =

tuptuOtcatnoCelbasserddA 033000.0 X =

srotalosIpooL 100.0 X =

rofnmuloCmuSdaoLybdnatS

)2setoN(= spmA

NOTE: 1. Auxiliary Outputs and each must be considered for total standby alarm loading of the system power supply.

2. Use of auxiliary 24 VDC outputs of during standby operation must not cause the calculated standby current of thesystem to exceed its rated maximum as defined in the Table A-6.

A-3 August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

A-3 SYSTEM ALARM POWER REQUIREMENTSNOTE: Use Table A4 (Alarm ) to determine main system power supply and any installed auxiliary power module combination,

alarm current requirements. When using additional main power supplies in expansion cabinets, each supply must beevaluated for its own loading in the same way as the primary power supply in the main cabinet.

Table A-4: Alarm Power Requirements (24 VDC)

eciveD/eludoMtnerruCmralA

)spmA(/eludoM

metsySmralAmumixaM)spmA(tnerruC

eludoMlortnoClartneC 012.0 X 1 = 012.0

)1etoNeeS(tuptuO20PMdna10PMMCC X

eludoMXTXR 530.0 X =

rotinoMylppuSrewoP 060.0 X =

)2etoNeeS(A5.1xaM,1tuptuOyrailixuA X =

)2etoNeeS(A5.1xaM,tuptuOyrailixuA X =

draoBrehtoMpooL-itluM 530. X =

eludoMtuptuOelbiduAlangiS 531.0 X =

)3etoNeeS(stuptuOeludoMlangiS X =

eludoMtuptuOyaleR 570.0 X =

eludoMtuptuOeiTytiC 080.0 X =

eludoMtuptuOesaeleRtnegA 051.0 X =

eeS(tiucriClangiSeludoMesaeleRtnegA)5etoN

X =

etoN(stiucriClangiSeludoMesaeleRtnegA)4

X =

SECIVEDDLEIF X =

rotceteDnoitazinoI 044000.0 X =

rotceteDcirtceleotohP 544000.0 X =

tupnItcatnoCelbasserddA 083000.0 X =

rotinoMenoZelbasserddA 004000.0 X =

tuptuOtcatnoCelbasserddA 053000.0 X =

)evitcA(srotalosIpooL 700.0 X =

nmuloCmuSmralArof

daoL= spmA

NOTE: 1. Central Control Module (CCM) Alarm condition power requirements must be evaluated for loading of the signalingdevices. Each signal circuit can provide up to 2 amps of 24 VDC power for signaling device use.

2. Auxiliary Outputs would have to be considered for total alarm loading of the system power supply.

3. Each Signal output modules alarm condition power requirements must be evaluated for loading of the signalingdevices. Each signal circuit can provide up to 2 amps of 24 VDC power for signaling device use. There are a total of 4signal circuits per module.

4. Each Agent Release module contains three signaling circuits which must be evaluated for loading. Each signal circuitwill provide up to 2 amps of 24 VDC power for signaling device use. There are a total of 3 signal circuits per module.

5. When using constant power solenoids, the current draw of the solenoid must be added in the calculation. Momentarysolenoids and initiators are negligible in there current draws and do not need to be added into the total calculation.

A-4August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

A-4 CALCULATING BATTERY SIZE REQUIREDTable A-5 sums the standby and alarm loads to arrive at the battery size, in amp hours (AH), needed to support the control panel.There is a maximum battery size which the system power supply (P/N 76-100009-010) is capable of charging. Select batteries whichmeet or exceed the total amp hours (AH) calculated and are within the acceptable range of the system battery charger output, whichis 12 to 99 AH. Using the totals from Table A-3 and Table A-4, complete Table A-5 to determine the total battery (AH) capacitynecessary for the power supply.

Table A-5: Total Battery Capacity Required

daoLybdnatSlatoT)3-AelbatmorF(

)(X

,42,4(emiTybdnatSderiuqeRsruoh)09ro06)(

=

morF(daoLmralAlatoT)4-Aelbat

)(

X

emiTmralAderiuqeR)480.0retne.nim5()761.0retne.niM01(

)(

=

deriuqeRsruoHpmAlatoT)evobafomuS(

=

1.0X)rotcaFgnitareD(

deriuqeRHAlatoT+deriuqerHAlanigirO(

)rotcaFgnitareD=

NOTE: 1. Main system enclosure can house up to (2) 33 AH batteries (P/N 89-100052-001). If an auxiliary power module is added to thesystem the batteries must be moved to a separate battery box or secondary enclosure, if used.

2. NFPA 72 - 1996 Protected Premises or Proprietary fire alarm systems require 24 hours of standby power followed by 5minutes alarm activation.

3. NFPA 72 - 1996 Auxiliary or Remote Station require 60 hours of standby power followed by 5 minutes alarm activation.

4. NFPA 72 - 1996 allow 4 hours of standby battery capacity if there is an automatic starting engine driven generator.

5. NFPA 12, 12A, 12B require 24 hours of standby and five minutes of alarm activation.

6. Factory Mutual requires Pre-action and Deluge systems to have 90 hours of battery standby and 10 minutes of alarm activation.

A-5 August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

A-5 POWER SUPPLY/BATTERY CAPACITY.The system is capable of charging batteries of various capacities up to 99 AH, refer to Table A-6 for details concerning batterycapacities and charging capabilities.

Table A-6. Battery Capacities

)sruoHpukcaB(yrettaBybdnatSelbaliavAmumixaM

spmAtnerruC)ylppuSrewoPenOroF(

ybdnatSelbaliavAmumixaMspmAtnerruC

)ylppuSrewoPowTroF(

)sruoh4(hA21 5.2

)sruoh4(hA71 6.3

)sruoh4(hA33 A/N 1.7

)sruoh42(hA33 2.1

)sruoh42(hA061 ylppuSrewoP1rofdewollAtoN 0.6

)sruoh42(hA66 9.0

)sruoh06(hA99 4.1

)sruoh06(hA99 9.0

)sruoh09(hA061 ylppuSrewoP1rofdewollAtoN 6.1

A-6 POWER REQUIREMENT EXAMPLEThe following power calculations will be based on a the system configuration listed below:

Central Control Panel (CCP) with: Field Devices:

- Central Control Module - Ten (10), Ionization Detectors- Two (2), RX/TX Modules - Twenty (20), Photoelectric Detectors- One (1), Power Supply Module - Ten (10), Heat Detectors- One (1), Multi-Loop Motherboard - Six (6), Addressable Contact Input Devices- Two (2), Signal Output Modules, with signal - Four (4), Addressable Contact Output Devices

appliances totaling .800A on each - One (1), Signaling Device, connected to MP1 of- One (1), Output Relay Module the CCM- One (1), Agent Release Output Module, has a

momentary control head on the releasingcircuit and signaling appliances totalling 0.5 A.

AC Branch Current Calculation Example: This example is based on the system specified in the previous paragraph. This systemcurrent calculation is for a 120VAC main feed. Refer to Paragraph A-1 for additional information.

A-6August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

epyTeciveDforebmuN

seciveDwarDtnerruC

)spmA(tnerruClatoT

eciveDrep

lenaPlortnoC 1 X 9.1 = 9.1

yrailixuAylppuSrewoP

)0( X 9.1 = 0

rofnmulocmuStnerruChcnarBCA

deriuqer= spmA9.1

Main Power Supply Loading Examples: This example is based on the same system as above. Refer to ParagraphA-2 for additional information.

Standby or Non-Alarm Power Requirement Calculation

eciveD/eludoMybdnatS

)spmA(tnerruC/eludoM

metsyS

mumixaMybdnatS

)spmA(tnerruC

eludoMlortnoClartneC 070.0 X 1 = 070.0

eludomXTXR 530.0 X 2 = 070.0

rotinoMylppusrewoP 060.0 X 1 = 060.0

A5.1xaM,1tuptuOyrailixuA X =

A5.1xaM,2tuptuOyrailixuA X =

draoBrehtoMpooL-itluM 530.0 X 1 = 530.0

eludoMtuptuOelbiduAlangiS 520.0 X 2 = 050.0

eludoMtuptuOyaleR 010.0 X 1 = 010.0

eludoMtuptuOeiTytiC 030.0 X =

eludoMtuptuOesaeleRtnegA 560.0 X 1 = 560.0

SECIVEDDLEIF

rotceteDnoitazinoI 004000.0 X 01 = 400.0

rotceteDcirtceleotohP 004000.0 X 02 = 800.0

rotceteDtaeH 004000.0 01 400.0

tupnItcatnoCelbasserddA 013000.0 X 6 = 4200.0

tuptuOtcatnoCelbasserddA 033000.0 X 4 = 6100.0

srotalosIpooL 100.0 X =

rofnmuloCmuSdaoLybdnatS = spmA083.0

Alarm Power Requirement Calculation

A-7 August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

eciveD/eludoMmralA

)spmA(tnerruC/eludoM

metsySmralAmumixaM)spmA(tnerruC

eludoMlortnoClartneC 012.0 X 1 = 012.0

tuptuO20PMdna10PMMCC 001.0 X 1 = 001.0

eludoMXTXR 530.0 X 2 = 070.0

rotinoMylppuSrewoP 060.0 X 1 = 060.0

A5.1xaM,1tuptuOyrailixuA 0 X =

A5.1xaM,2tuptuOyrailixuA 0 X =

draoBrehtoMpooL-itluM 530.0 X 1 = 530.0

eludoMtuptuOelbiduAlangiS 531.0 X 2 = 072.0

stuptuOeludoMlangiS 008.0 X latot = 008.0

eludoMtuptuOyaleR 570.0 X 1 = 570.0

eludoMtuptuOeiTytiC 080.0 X =

eludoMesaeleRtnegA 051.0 X 1 = 051.0

stiucriCtuptuOesaeleRtnegAgnisU0

yratnemomecived

X 1 = 0

tiucriClangiSeludoMesaeleRtnegA 005. X 1 = 005.0

SECIVEDDLEIF X =

rotceteDnoitazinoI 044000.0 X 01 = 4400.0

rotceteDcirtceleotohP 544000.0 X 02 = 8800.0

rotceteDtaeH 044000.0 X 01 = 4400.0

tupnItcatnoCelbasserddA 083000.0 X 6 = 6200.0

tuptuOtcatnoCelbasserddA 004000.0 X 4 = 8100.0

)evitcA(srotalosIpooL 700.0 X =

nmuloCmuSmralArof

daoL= spmA292.2

Battery Size Requirement Calculation Example: This example is based on the same system as above. Refer to Paragraph A-4for additional information.

A-8August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

Battery Size Requirement Calculation

ybdnatSmorflatoTtnemeriuqeRrewoP

noitaluclaC)083.0(

X

ybdnatSderiuqeR)09ro06,42,4(emiT

sruoh)42(

= 21.9

mralAmorflatoTtnemeriuqeRrewoP

noitaluclaC)292.2(

X

emiTmralAderiuqeR)480.0retne.nim5()761.0retne.niM01(

)480.0(

= 5291.0

smushtobfolatoTsruoHpmAslauqe

deriuqeR)evobAfomuS(

= 213.9

1.0X)rotcafgnitareD( 2139.0

deriuqeRHAlatoTHAlatotlanigirO(

gnitareD+deriuqer)rotcaF

= 42.01

Example Results: The results of the prior calculations are as follows:a. Current requirement of the 120VAC Main Feed is 1.9 Amps.b. System Power Requirement when in Standby is 0.380 Amps.c. System Power Requirements when in Alarm is 2.292 Amps.d. Battery Size Requirement is 10.241 Amp-Hours. Select 12 AH batteries.

B-1 August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

APPENDIX BSYSTEM EXPANSION

The PEGAsys system is capable of substantial expansion in thenumber of RX/TX loops, I/O modules and system output power.The system will support up to 16 I/O modules for single loop and23 I/O modules for multi-loop - a maximum of 8 of any one type ofmodule. The system power supply monitor module can super-vise two power supply units (4 amps each for a total of 8 ampsper module) which allows for up to 64 amps of 24 VDC power.The following diagrams will demonstrate the available ways ofexpanding the system.

Figure B-1 shows the single loop PEGAsys system (P/N 76-100000-501). This includes the Central Control Module (CCM),Receiver/Transmitter (RX/TX) module, Power Supply/Chargerassembly and the system enclosure. The basic system can beexpanded as shown in the following sections

06-129562-00106-129562-001

NO

NC

RS

48

5R

S4

85 A

B

CC

MC

CM

MO

TH

ER

BD

MO

TH

ER

BD

SY

ST

EM

PO

WE

RS

YS

TE

MP

OW

ER

24

V2

4V

RE

TR

ET

24

V2

4V

RE

TR

ET

24V

RET

24V

24V

RET

RET

24V

RET

BA

TB

AT+

-

AUX 1AUX 1 AUX 2AUX 2

DC

IN2

DC

IN2

C

DC IN 1DC IN 1AC OUTAC OUT

N1

L2

N GL N

AC INAC IN

24

V2

4V

L SH

RS

HR

RE

TR

ET

SHR

TP

4T

P4

TP

3T

P3

DS1

S3

TB

9T

B9

TB

8T

B8

R

R

2

1

1

2

S1

AS

HLA

ND

,M

A01721

AS

HLA

ND

,M

A01721

KID

DE

-FE

NW

AL

,IN

C.

KID

DE

-FE

NW

AL

,IN

C.

RET

TB

LR

EL

AY

TB

LR

EL

AY

TB

LR

EL

AY

TB

LR

EL

AY

W2

W2

W3

W3

W4

F1

F1

W1

W1

S2

PEGAsysKIDDE

Figure B-1. Single Loop

Figure B-2 shows the single-loop PEGAsys system with theoptional I/O motherboard (P/N 76-100007-001) installed. The I/O motherboard provides the system with mechanical and elec-trical interfaces for up to eight I/O modules of any style. The I/Omodules are installed by inserting them into the desiredmotherboard slot and fastening with the two screws provided.

The PEGAsys ML (Multi-loop) system (P/N 76-100000-600) looksmuch the same as the system in Figure B-2 with the exception ofthe multi-loop motherboard (P/N 76-100017-001) in the place ofthe basic motherboard (P/N 76-100007-001). The Multi-loopmotherboard has the ability to connect up to 8 RX/TX loop con-trollers, for a maximum of 2040 Intelligent addressable points persystem.

06-129562-00106-129562-001

NO

NC

RS

48

5R

S4

85 A

B

CC

MC

CM

MO

TH

ER

BD

MO

TH

ER

BD

SY

ST

EM

PO

WE

RS

YS

TE

MP

OW

ER

24V

24V

RE

TR

ET

24V

24V

RE

TR

ET

24V

RET

24V

24V

RET

RET

24V

RET

BA

TB

AT+

-

AUX 1AUX 1 AUX 2AUX 2

DC

IN2

DC

IN2

C

DC IN 1DC IN 1AC OUTAC OUT

N1

L2

N GL N

AC INAC IN

24V

24V

L SH

RS

HR

RE

TR

ET

SHR

TP

4T

P4

TP

3T

P3

DS1

S3

TB

9T

B9

TB

8T

B8

R

R

2

1

1

2

S1

AS

HLA

ND

,M

A01721

AS

HLA

ND

,M

A01721

KID

DE

-FE

NW

AL

,IN

C.

KID

DE

-FE

NW

AL

,IN

C.

RET

TB

LR

EL

AY

TB

LR

EL

AY

TB

LR

EL

AY

TB

LR

EL

AY

W2

W2

W3

W3

W4

F1

W1

W1

S2

PEGAsysKIDDE

Figure B-2. Single Loop with Motherboard

Figure B-3 shows the PEGAsys system with an auxiliary powermodule (P/N 76-100009-002) installed. The auxiliary power sup-ply module provides an additional 4 amps of 24 VDC power fora total of 8 amps for system use. The unit would be installed ifthe system required more than the base system's 4 amps of 24VDC power. When the auxiliary module is installed the systembatteries are moved to a battery cabinet. P/N 76-100010-001 isan UL listed battery enclosure for use with the PEGAsys.

This figure could also be a multi-loop system with the inclusionof the multi-loop motherboard and additional RX/TX loop con-trollers.

B-2August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

06-129562-00106-129562-001

NO

NC

RS

48

5R

S4

85 A

B

CC

MC

CM

MO

TH

ER

BD

MO

TH

ER

BD

SY

ST

EM

PO

WE

RS

YS

TE

MP

OW

ER

24

V2

4V

RE

TR

ET

24

V2

4V

RE

TR

ET

24V

RET

24V

24V

RET

RET

24V

RET

BA

TB

AT+

-

AUX 1AUX 1 AUX 2AUX 2

DC

IN2

DC

IN2

C

DC IN 1DC IN 1AC OUTAC OUT

N1

L2

N GL N

AC INAC IN

24

V2

4V

L SH

RS

HR

RE

TR

ET

SHR

TP

4T

P4

TP

3T

P3

DS1

S3

TB

9T

B9

TB

8T

B8

R

R

2

1

1

2

S1

AS

HLA

ND

,M

A01721

AS

HLA

ND

,M

A01721

KID

DE

-FE

NW

AL

,IN

C.

KID

DE

-FE

NW

AL

,IN

C.

RET

TB

LR

EL

AY

TB

LR

EL

AY

TB

LR

EL

AY

TB

LR

EL

AY

W2

W2

W3

W3

W4

F1

F1

W1

W1

S2

PEGAsysKIDDE

Figure B-3. System with Auxiliary Power Supply Module

Figure B-4 shows an expanded single-loop PEGAsys systemwhich contains two motherboard assemblies, three completepower supply assemblies (24 Amps of 24 VDC power), and upto 16 total possible I/O modules. The I/O bus interconnectionsbetween the two motherboards are done using 6 conductorsfrom the I/O bus terminal block on the motherboard in the mainenclosure to connect to the same terminal block on themotherboard in the expansion enclosure. This connection al-lows complete supervision of all I/O modules installed on thesecond motherboard by the CCM in the main enclosure. 24 VDCpower for the motherboard in the expansion enclosure wouldderive from one of the power supply assemblies installed in thatenclosure. A simple two-wire connection is all that would berequired.

The power supplies need to be tied to the I/O bus for communi-cations purposes. To accomplish this in the above example, theinstaller would use a two conductor cable to connect the RX/TXof the I/O bus from the motherboard assembly to the power sup-ply. The second power supply could then be daisy chained tothe first to complete the communications connections.

Auxiliary power supplies in the expansion enclosure can sharea set of batteries or could support their own set of batteriesseparately.

06-129562-00106-129562-001

NO

NC

RS

48

5R

S4

85 A

B

CC

MC

CM

MO

TH

ER

BD

MO

TH

ER

BD

SY

ST

EM

PO

WE

RS

YS

TE

MP

OW

ER

24

V2

4V

RE

TR

ET

24

V2

4V

RE

TR

ET

24V

RET

24V

24V

RET

RET

24V

RET

BA

TB

AT+

-

AUX 1AUX 1 AUX 2AUX 2

DC

IN2

DC

IN2

C

DC IN 1DC IN 1AC OUTAC OUT

N1

L2

N GL N

AC INAC IN

24

V2

4V

L SH

RS

HR

RE

TR

ET

SHR

TP

4T

P4

TP

3T

P3

DS1

S3

TB

9T

B9

TB

8T

B8

R

R

2

1

1

2

S1

AS

HL

AN

D,

MA

01

72

1A

SH

LA

ND

,M

A0

17

21

KID

DE

-FE

NW

AL

,IN

C.

KID

DE

-FE

NW

AL

,IN

C.

RET

TB

LR

EL

AY

TB

LR

EL

AY

TB

LR

EL

AY

TB

LR

EL

AY

W2

W2

W3

W3

W4

F1

F1

W1

W1

S2

06

-12

95

62

-00

10

6-1

29

56

2-0

01

NO

NO

NC

NC

RS485

AB

CCMMOTHER BDMOTHER BD

SYSTEM POWERSYSTEM POWER

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

24V

RE

TR

ET

24V

24V

24V

24V

RE

TR

ET

RE

TR

ET

24V

24V

RE

TR

ET

BAT

+-

AU

X1

AU

X1

AU

X2

AU

X2

DC IN 2DC IN 2

C

DC

IN1

DC

IN1

AC

OU

TA

CO

UT

N1

L2

NG

LN

AC

INA

CIN

24V

L

SHR

RET

SH

RS

HR

TP4TP3

DS

1D

S1

S3

S3

TB9TB8

R R

211 2

S1

S1

ASHLAND, MA 01721ASHLAND, MA 01721KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.

RE

TR

ET

TBL RELAYTBL RELAYTBL RELAYTBL RELAYW2 W3

W4

W4

F1

W1

S2

S2

06

-12

95

62

-00

10

6-1

29

56

2-0

01

NO

NO

NC

NC

RS485

AB

CCMMOTHER BDMOTHER BD

SYSTEM POWERSYSTEM POWER

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

24V

RE

TR

ET

24V

24V

24V

24V

RE

TR

ET

RE

TR

ET

24V

24V

RE

TR

ET

BAT

+-

AU

X1

AU

X1

AU

X2

AU

X2

DC IN 2DC IN 2

C

DC

IN1

DC

IN1

AC

OU

TA

CO

UT

N1

L2

NG

LN

AC

INA

CIN

24V

L

SHR

RETRET

SH

RS

HR

TP4TP3

DS

1D

S1

S3

S3

TB9TB8

R R

211 2

S1

S1

ASHLAND, MA 01721ASHLAND, MA 01721KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.

RE

TR

ET

TBL RELAYTBL RELAYTBL RELAYTBL RELAYW2 W3

W4

W4

F1

W1

S2

S2

PEGAsysKIDDE

Figure B-4. Expanded Single Loop System

Figure B-5 shows an expanded PEGAsys system which is ca-pable of having 8 I/O modules of various types and a maximum24VDC power at 40 amps. This DC power would be hardwiredinto signal and release modules whose loading would otherwisecause more than 8 amps of 24 VDC current to be drawn from themotherboard during activation.

The hardwire option allows the system installer to provide indi-vidual modules with their own power source. Refer to the particu-lar modules installation diagram in Chapter 7 and Appendix A forpower-supply expansion guidelines.

B-3 August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

06-129562-00106-129562-001

NONO

NC

RS

485

RS

48

5 A

B

CC

MC

CM

MO

TH

ER

BD

MO

TH

ER

BD

SY

ST

EM

PO

WE

RS

YS

TE

MP

OW

ER

24V

24V

RE

TR

ET

24V

24V

RE

TR

ET

24V

RET

24V

24V

RET

RET

24V

RET

BA

TB

AT+

-

AUX 1AUX 1 AUX 2AUX 2

DC

IN2

DC

IN2

C

DC IN 1DC IN 1AC OUTAC OUT

N1

L2

N GL N

AC INAC IN

24V

24V

L SH

RS

HR

RE

TR

ET

SHR

TP

4T

P4

TP

3T

P3

DS1

S3

TB

9T

B9

TB

8T

B8

R

R

2

1

1

2

S1

AS

HL

AN

D,

MA

01

72

1A

SH

LA

ND

,M

A0

17

21

KID

DE

-FE

NW

AL

,IN

C.

KID

DE

-FE

NW

AL

,IN

C.

RET

TB

LR

EL

AY

TB

LR

EL

AY

TB

LR

EL

AY

TB

LR

EL

AY

W2

W2

W3

W3

W4

F1

F1

W1

W1

S2

06

-12

95

62

-00

10

6-1

29

56

2-0

01

NO

NO

NC

NC

RS485RS485

AB

CCMMOTHER BDMOTHER BD

SYSTEM POWERSYSTEM POWER

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

24V

RE

TR

ET

24V

24V

24V

24V

RE

TR

ET

RE

TR

ET

24V

24V

RE

TR

ET

BAT

+-

AU

X1

AU

X1

AU

X2

AU

X2

DC IN 2DC IN 2

C

DC

IN1

DC

IN1

AC

OU

TA

CO

UT

N1

L2

NG

LN

AC

INA

CIN

24V

L

SHR

RET

SH

RS

HR

TP4TP3

DS

1D

S1

S3

S3

TB9TB8

R R

211 2

S1

S1

ASHLAND, MA 01721ASHLAND, MA 01721KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.

RE

TR

ET

TBL RELAYTBL RELAYTBL RELAYTBL RELAYW2 W3

W4

W4

F1

W1

S2

S2

06

-12

95

62

-00

10

6-1

29

56

2-0

01

NO

NO

NC

NC

RS485RS485

AB

CCMMOTHER BDMOTHER BD

SYSTEM POWERSYSTEM POWER

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

24V

RE

TR

ET

24V

24V

24V

24V

RE

TR

ET

RE

TR

ET

24V

24V

RE

TR

ET

BAT

+-

AU

X1

AU

X1

AU

X2

AU

X2

DC IN 2DC IN 2

C

DC

IN1

DC

IN1

AC

OU

TA

CO

UT

N1

L2

NG

LN

AC

INA

CIN

24V

L

SHR

RET

SH

RS

HR

TP4TP4TP3

DS

1D

S1

S3

S3

TB9TB8

R R

211 2

S1

S1

ASHLAND, MA 01721ASHLAND, MA 01721KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.

RE

TR

ET

TBL RELAYTBL RELAYTBL RELAYTBL RELAYW2 W3

W4

W4

F1

W1

S2

S2

06

-12

95

62

-00

10

6-1

29

56

2-0

01

NO

NO

NC

NC

RS485RS485

AB

CCMCCMMOTHER BDMOTHER BD

SYSTEM POWERSYSTEM POWER

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

24V

RE

TR

ET

24V

24V

24V

24V

RE

TR

ET

RE

TR

ET

24V

24V

RE

TR

ET

BAT

+-

AU

X1

AU

X1

AU

X2

AU

X2

DC IN 2DC IN 2

C

DC

IN1

DC

IN1

AC

OU

TA

CO

UT

N1

L2

NG

LN

AC

INA

CIN

24V

L

SHR

RET

SH

RS

HR

TP4TP3

DS

1D

S1

S3

S3

TB9TB8

R R

211 2

S1

S1

ASHLAND, MA 01721ASHLAND, MA 01721KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.

RE

TR

ET

TBL RELAYTBL RELAYTBL RELAYTBL RELAYW2 W3

W4

W4

F1

W1

S2

S2

06

-12

95

62

-00

10

6-1

29

56

2-0

01

NO

NO

NC

NC

RS485RS485

AB

CCMMOTHER BDMOTHER BD

SYSTEM POWERSYSTEM POWER

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

24V

RE

TR

ET

24V

24V

24V

24V

RE

TR

ET

RE

TR

ET

24V

24V

RE

TR

ET

BAT

+-

AU

X1

AU

X1

AU

X2

AU

X2

DC IN 2DC IN 2

C

DC

IN1

DC

IN1

AC

OU

TA

CO

UT

N1

L2

NG

LN

AC

INA

CIN

24V

L

SHR

RET

SH

RS

HR

TP4TP3

DS

1D

S1

S3

S3

TB9TB8

R R

211 2

S1

S1

ASHLAND, MA 01721ASHLAND, MA 01721KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.

RE

TR

ET

TBL RELAYTBL RELAYTBL RELAYTBL RELAYW2 W3

W4

W4

F1

W1

S2

S2

PEGAsysKIDDE

Figure B-5. Expanded Sys. with I/O Modules & P.S.

Figure B-6 shows a expanded PEGAsys system which could have16 I/O modules and 56 amps of 24 VDC power. The figure alsodisplays the flexibility to bring all four power supply assemblies inthe second expansion enclosure to one set of batteries. In thisarrangement one of the four power supplies charges the batter-ies, and all four receive standby power from the batteries. Eachpower supply must have its own two conductors connected di-rectly to the battery set to meet code requirements. The threenon-charging power supplies must have Jumper W1 cut to dis-able their charging circuits. Refer to Chapter 7 and Appendix Afor more details on power expansion.

Figure B-7 shows an expanded PEGAsys ML system which couldhave up to 8 RX/TX loop controllers and 9 I/O modules installedin the two motherboards. The system also has a maximum 24VDC power of 24 amps as shown in the diagram. Refer to Chap-ter 7 and Appendix A for power supply expansion guidelines.

06-129562-001

NO

NC

RS

48

5R

S4

85 A

B

CC

MC

CM

MO

TH

ER

BD

MO

TH

ER

BD

SY

ST

EM

PO

WE

RS

YS

TE

MP

OW

ER

24V

24V

RE

TR

ET

24V

24V

RE

TR

ET

24V

RET

24V

24V

RET

RET

24V

RET

BA

TB

AT+

-

AUX 1AUX 1 AUX 2AUX 2

DC

IN2

DC

IN2

C

DC IN 1DC IN 1AC OUTAC OUT

N1

L2

N GL N

AC INAC IN

24V

24V

L SH

RS

HR

RE

TR

ET

SHR

TP

4T

P4

TP

3T

P3

DS1

S3

TB

9T

B9

TB

8T

B8

R

R

2

1

1

2

S1

AS

HLA

ND

,M

A01721

AS

HLA

ND

,M

A01721

KID

DE

-FE

NW

AL

,IN

C.

KID

DE

-FE

NW

AL

,IN

C.

RET

TB

LR

EL

AY

TB

LR

EL

AY

TB

LR

EL

AY

TB

LR

EL

AY

W2

W2

W3

W3

W4

F1

F1

W1

W1

S2

06-1

29562-0

01

06-1

29562-0

01

NO

NO

NC

NC

RS485

AB

CCMMOTHER BDMOTHER BD

SYSTEM POWERSYSTEM POWER

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

24V

RE

TR

ET

24V

24V

24V

24V

RE

TR

ET

RE

TR

ET

24V

24V

RE

TR

ET

BAT

+-

AU

X1

AU

X1

AU

X2

AU

X2

DC IN 2DC IN 2

C

DC

IN1

DC

IN1

AC

OU

TA

CO

UT

N1

L2

NG

LN

AC

INA

CIN

24V

L

SHR

RET

SH

RS

HR

TP4TP3

DS

1D

S1

S3

S3

TB9TB8

R R

211 2

S1

S1

ASHLAND, MA 01721ASHLAND, MA 01721KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.

RE

TR

ET

TBL RELAYTBL RELAYTBL RELAYTBL RELAYW2 W3

W4

W4

F1

W1

S2

S2

06-1

29562-0

01

06-1

29562-0

01

NO

NO

NC

NC

RS485

AB

CCMMOTHER BDMOTHER BD

SYSTEM POWERSYSTEM POWER

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

24V

RE

TR

ET

24V

24V

24V

24V

RE

TR

ET

RE

TR

ET

24V

24V

RE

TR

ET

BAT

+-

AU

X1

AU

X1

AU

X2

AU

X2

DC IN 2DC IN 2

C

DC

IN1

DC

IN1

AC

OU

TA

CO

UT

N1

L2

NG

LN

AC

INA

CIN

24V

L

SHR

RET

SH

RS

HR

TP4TP3

DS

1D

S1

S3

S3

TB9TB8

R R

211 2

S1

S1

ASHLAND, MA 01721ASHLAND, MA 01721KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.

RE

TR

ET

TBL RELAYTBL RELAYTBL RELAYTBL RELAYW2 W3

W4

W4

F1

W1

S2

S2

06-1

29562-0

01

06-1

29562-0

01

NO

NO

NC

NC

RS485RS485

AB

CCMMOTHER BDMOTHER BD

SYSTEM POWERSYSTEM POWER

24V

RET

24V

RETRET

24V

24V

RE

TR

ET

24V

24V

24V

24V

RE

TR

ET

RE

TR

ET

24V

24V

RE

TR

ET

BAT

+-

AU

X1

AU

X1

AU

X2

AU

X2

DC IN 2DC IN 2

C

DC

IN1

DC

IN1

AC

OU

TA

CO

UT

N1

L2

NG

LN

AC

INA

CIN

24V24V

L

SHR

RET

SH

RS

HR

TP4TP3

DS

1D

S1

S3

S3

TB9TB8

R R

211 2

S1

S1

ASHLAND, MA 01721ASHLAND, MA 01721KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.

RE

TR

ET

TBL RELAYTBL RELAYTBL RELAYTBL RELAYW2 W3

W4

W4

F1

W1

S2

S2

06-1

29562-0

01

06-1

29562-0

01

NO

NO

NC

NC

RS485RS485

AB

CCMMOTHER BDMOTHER BD

SYSTEM POWERSYSTEM POWER

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

24V

RE

TR

ET

24V

24V

24V

24V

RE

TR

ET

RE

TR

ET

24V

24V

RE

TR

ET

BAT

+-

AU

X1

AU

X1

AU

X2

AU

X2

DC IN 2DC IN 2

C

DC

IN1

DC

IN1

AC

OU

TA

CO

UT

N1

L2

NG

LN

AC

INA

CIN

24V

L

SHRSHR

RET

SH

RS

HR

TP4TP3

DS

1D

S1

S3

S3

TB9TB8

R R

211 2

S1

S1

ASHLAND, MA 01721ASHLAND, MA 01721KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.

RE

TR

ET

TBL RELAYTBL RELAYTBL RELAYTBL RELAYW2 W3

W4

W4

F1

W1

S2

S2

06-1

29562-0

01

06-1

29562-0

01

NO

NO

NC

NC

RS485RS485

AB

CCMMOTHER BDMOTHER BD

SYSTEM POWERSYSTEM POWER

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

24V

RE

TR

ET

24V

24V

24V

24V

RE

TR

ET

RE

TR

ET

24V

24V

RE

TR

ET

BAT

+-

AU

X1

AU

X1

AU

X2

AU

X2

DC IN 2DC IN 2

C

DC

IN1

DC

IN1

AC

OU

TA

CO

UT

N1

L2

NG

LN

AC

INA

CIN

24V

L

SHR

RET

SH

RS

HR

TP4TP3

DS

1D

S1

S3

S3

TB9TB8

R R

211 2

S1

S1

ASHLAND, MA 01721ASHLAND, MA 01721KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.

RE

TR

ET

TBL RELAYTBL RELAYTBL RELAYTBL RELAYW2 W3

W4

W4

F1

W1

S2

S2

06-1

29562-0

01

06-1

29562-0

01

NO

NO

NC

NC

RS485RS485

AB

CCMMOTHER BDMOTHER BD

SYSTEM POWERSYSTEM POWER

24V

RET

24V24V

RET

24V

24V

RE

TR

ET

24V

24V

24V

24V

RE

TR

ET

RE

TR

ET

24V

24V

RE

TR

ET

BAT

+-

AU

X1

AU

X1

AU

X2

AU

X2

DC IN 2DC IN 2

C

DC

IN1

DC

IN1

AC

OU

TA

CO

UT

N1

L2

NG

LN

AC

INA

CIN

24V24V

L

SHR

RET

SH

RS

HR

TP4TP3

DS

1D

S1

S3

S3

TB9TB8

R R

211 2

S1

S1

ASHLAND, MA 01721ASHLAND, MA 01721KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.

RE

TR

ET

TBL RELAYTBL RELAYTBL RELAYTBL RELAYW2 W3

W4

W4

F1

W1

S2

S2

PEGAsysKIDDE

Figure B-6. Expanded Sys. with I/O Modules & P.S.

NOTE: One main power supply/charger assembly can beused to charge a common set of batteries. All other powersupply/charger assemblies could be connected to the com-mon set of batteries in parallel for backup DC power only.You will also need to disable the charging circuit on theadditional power supply/charger assemblies by cuttingjumper W1. Be careful not to exceed the maximum charg-ing capacity of the main power supply.

B-4August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

Figure B-7. Expanded ML Sys. with 8 RX/TX & 9 I/O Modules

C-1 August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

APPENDIX CRELEASING APPLICATIONS

The PEGAsys system can be used for agent release,pre-action, sprinkler and deluge sprinkler control applications.When used with UL listed, compatible actuating and initiatingdevices, the PEGAsys system meets the requirements of thefollowing standards:

NFPA 12 CO2 Extinguishing Systems (High Pressure)

NFPA 12A HALON 1301 Extinguishing Systems

NFPA 13 Sprinkler Systems

NFPA 15 Water Spray Systems

NFPA 16 Foam-Water Deluge and Foam-Water SpraySystems

NFPA 17 Dry-Chemical Extinguishing Systems

NFPA 17A Wet-Chemical Extinguishing Systems

NFPA 2001 Clean-Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems

C-1 PROGRAMMINGThe PEGAsys system can support up to nine independentlycontrolled releasing outputs (AR1 - AR8 and MP1), which areused to control releasing functions. AR1 - AR8 are the agentrelease I/O modules, which are inserted into the I/O motherboardand MP1 is the CCM releasing output, which is optionally pro-grammable to be a signal release output. The PCS program isused to program the system for all functions including the re-

Table C-1. Abort Styles

NOTE: The abort function will not work if a time delay value is not entered in the EOC programming for the hazard. Maximumallowable delay is 60 seconds as allowed by UL864. The abort input is not intended to be used for a service disconnect.

epyTtrobA noitpircseD

seirotarobaLretirwrednULUhtiwseilpmoC()LU(

)468

01taspotsdna,noitavitcatrobanopunwodtnuocotseunitnocremityaleD,hctiwstrobafoesaelernopU.hctiwstrobafoesaelerlitnukramdnoces

.sdnoces01tagnitratsnwodtnuocehtsemuserremit

srerusnIksiRlairtsudnILUhtiwseilpmoC()IRI(

)468

noitpecxeylnoehthtiw,trobaepyt-LUehtotrennamralimisnisnoitcnuFdnocesehtfotpiecerehtotroirpdlehfinoitcnufylnolliwtrobaehttaht

.mrala

ytiCkroYweN

remityaledehtsegnahc,stsixemralanaecno,hctiwstrobaehtfonoitarepOtratstonlliwremitehT.sdnoces09lanoitiddanasulpyaleddetcelesehtotseunitnochctiwstrobaehtfoesaeleR.dlehsihctiwstrobaehtsagnolsa.yaledlanoitiddasdnoces09ehtsulpeulavlaitiniehtmorfnwodtnuoceht

noitcidsiruJlacoLehtserotserhctiwstrobaehtfonoitarepo,detratssahremityaledehtecnOtrobaehtsagnolsatratstonlliwremityaledehT.eulavlanigirostiotremit

.nwodtnuocehtseunitnochctiwstrobaehtfoesaeleR.dlehsihctiws

leasing. For complete details refer to the PCS users guide.The following features are supported for releasing functions,with which the system will be compatible.

C-2 ABORTThe abort function is a feature which manually stops a dischargetime delay. The PEGAsys supports four styles of aborts, as listedin Table C-1.

C-3 DELAYThe time delay period is an installer programmable value whichbegins to count down after alarm activation of an initiatingdevice(s) which is protecting the protected area and mapped tothe agent-release output. The time delay can be programmedfor activation after one or two alarm occurrences.

C-4 SOAKThe soak function is used to automatically shut off the releas-ing solenoid at a predetermined time after the mapped inputsactivate them. It may be programmed as a 10 minute or 15 minutesoak period. This soak function is for use in NFPA 16 applica-tions only.

C-2August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

C-5 SPECIAL MODULE TYPESThe PEGAsys provides specific styles of devices which havespecial releasing functions, these devices are:

C-5.1 Abort SwitchThe abort switch is connected to an addressable contact moni-tor (P/N 70-407008-001) which is programmed as an abort in-put, with a selected abort style as explained in Table C-1. Theaddressable contact monitor would be connected to a listed abortstation, such as the Kidde Suppression System Abort switch

Figure C-1. Addressable Contact Monitor Interconnection

NOTE: The 10-K ohm resistor must be connected across the abort station contacts for supervision.Failure to install this resistor will result in a "Trouble Open" message for that monitor.

Addressable Contact MonitorP/N 70-407008-001

PUSH / HOLD

SUPPRESSION SYSTEM ABORT

10K ohmsP/N 06-129025-003

P/N 87875201

MO

DE

LA

I,N

/O

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

SE

EIN

STA

LLA

TIO

N

CA

T.N

O.70-4

07008-0

01

Sm

art

On

eT

M

FO

RS

ER

VIC

ES

EN

DT

O:

KID

DE

-FE

NW

AL

,IN

C.

400

MA

INS

T.

AS

HLA

ND

,M

A01721

DA

TE

OF

MA

NU

FA

CT

UR

E:

MA

X.IN

STA

LL.T

EM

P.120

°F

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

06-2

35578-0

01

PCPCPCPC(+)(-)(+)(-)

8

A

SW

B

SW(+)LED

(-)LED

Remote LED(Optional)

PC LineIn

(+)

(-)

(+)

(-)PC Line

Out

ALL

TE

RM

INA

LS

AR

EP

OW

ER

LIM

ITE

D

(P/N 87875201). Figure C-1 shows the interconnection of theaddressable contact monitor and the abort station switch.

C-5.2 Manual Release SwitchThe manual release switch is an addressable contact monitor(P/N 70-407008-001) which is programmed as an manual re-lease input. The addressable contact monitor would be con-nected to a listed manual release station such as the KiddeSuppression Agent Release switch (P/N 84-100007-00X). Fig-ure C-2 shows the interconnection of the addressable contactmonitor and the manual release switch.

Figure C-2. Manual Release Switch

NOTE: The 10-K ohm resistor must be connected across the manual poll station contacts for supervision.Failure to install this resistor will result in a "Trouble Open" message for that contact monitor.

PUSHPULL

R

P/N 84-100007-00XAddressable Contact MonitorP/N 70-407008-001

10K ohmsP/N 06-129025-003

MO

DE

LA

I,N

/O

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

SE

EIN

STA

LLA

TIO

N

CA

T.N

O.70-4

07008-0

01

Sm

art

On

eT

M

FO

RS

ER

VIC

ES

EN

DT

O:

KID

DE

-FE

NW

AL,IN

C.

400

MA

INS

T.

AS

HLA

ND

,M

A01721

DA

TE

OF

MA

NU

FA

CT

UR

E:

MA

X.IN

STA

LL.T

EM

P.120°F

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

06-2

35578-0

01

PCPCPCPC(+)(-)(+)(-)

8

A

SW

B

SW(+)LED

(-)LED

Remote LED(Optional)

PC LineIn

(+)

(-)

(+)

(-)PC Line

Out

ALL

TE

RM

INA

LS

AR

EP

OW

ER

LIM

ITE

D

FIREALARM

FIREALARM

C-3 August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

C-6 AGENT RELEASE APPLICATIONS

C-6.1 CCM Release Output WiringThe PEGAsys system provides one output on the CCM (MP01,Terminal TB4(A)), is fully supervised and can is defaulted as arelease output. Refer to Appendix I, Drawing No. 06-235443-001, and to the PCS program users guide for details on theconfiguration of this output.

An example of the CCM releasing circuit wiring is shown in Fig-ure C-3. For wiring details refer to the CCM wiring diagram,Drawing No. 06-235443-001 (Appendix I).

Figure C-3. CCM Release Output, Wiring Basics

C-6.2 Release Module Output WiringThe agent release modules which the PEGAsys system uses toprovide the release function offer one release output capable ofpowering two solenoids simultaneously. Refer to Appendix I,Drawing No. 06-235443-005, and to the PCS program usersguide for details on configuration of the release outputs alongwith all other system parameters.

All wiring from the agent release module to the release device isfully supervised, including the actual device in the circuit. Ex-amples of the releasing circuit wiring is provided in figure C-4.For all wiring detail refer to the Release Module wiring diagram,drawing number 06-235443-005 (in Appendix I) for specific wir-ing details. For a list of approved devices, refer to Table 3-2 in thismanual.

Figure C-4. Release Module, Wiring Basics

C-7 PRE-ACTION SPRINKLER APPLICATIONSThe PEGAsys system can be used to activate and supervise pre-action sprinkler and deluge sprinkler systems for protection of fa-cilities. The CCM output (MP1) and agent release output modules(AR1 - AR8) can be programmed for use with most popular sprin-kler solenoids.

For sprinkler applications the addressable input module P/N 70-407008-00x can be used to monitor and supervise any of the fol-lowing sprinkler type inputs as required for each particularapplication. Inputs could be air pressure, waterflow, water level(tank), pump running, etc. Refer to Chapter 2 for details on pro-gramming the addressable input device for various reportingstyles.

C-4August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

(THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)

D-1 August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

APPENDIX D

Space Reserved for Future Use.

D-2August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

(THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)

E-1 August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

APPENDIX EFACTORY MUTUAL SPRINKLER REQUIREMENTS

FORPRE-ACTION AND DELUGE TYPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

E-1 GENERAL INFORMATIONPEGAsys system installation applications which require Fac-tory Mutual (FM) approval of pre-action and deluge sprinklersystems must conform to the following guidelines. SmartOne Thermal Detectors, Model THD-7252, when

used must be installed at 20 Ft. spacings. The pre-alarmand alarm setpoint ranges are as follows:

Pre-alarm 80 to 155 deg FAlarm 135 to 155 deg F

Initiating Circuits (RX/TX - PC line) must be configured forStyle 6 wiring. Refer to Drawing No. 06-235443-002 for com-plete RX/TX PC line wiring instructions.

Provide 90 hours of standby battery and 10 minutes of alarmoperation. Refer to Appendix A.

Agent release output can be CCM output MP1 or I/O mod-ule agent release module AR1 - AR8. Each output wouldbe required to be configured for solenoid activation. Thesolenoid output-on time period would need to be set to ei-ther 90 seconds or on until reset using the PCS pro-gram.

E-2August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

(THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)

F-1 August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

APPENDIX FGLOSSARY

sserddAsitigidts1.ecivedelbasserddarotramsafosserddaehtgnitacidniedoctigidruofA

.rebmunecivedehterastigideerhtgniniamerehtdnarebmunpoolXT/XReht

eciveDelbasserddAaaivetatsdnasserddastietacinummocyllacitamotuaotytilibapacehthtiwecivedA

.lenaPlortnoClartneCaotknurtxelpitlum

elbasserddAeciveDtcatnoC

)DICA(

sepytecivedowT.ecivedmralaerifdradnatsasrotinomhcihwecivedelbasserddanA.desolCyllamroN&nepOyllamroN:elbaliavaera

ksaTevitartsinimdA .lenaPlortnoClartneCehtfosnoitcnufgnipeekesuohrehtodna,sutats,stsil,stropeR

noitacifireVmralAemitnoitacifirevehtroftiawotmetsysehtsesuachcihwyaledemitdemmargorperpA

steeM.stuptuomralademmargorperpehtgnitavitcaerofebespaleotdoirepyaled.noitinifed3991-27APFNeht

golanA.ytitnauqlacisyhpdnaelbairavsuounitnocafosnaemybnoitatneserperotgniniatreP

.cte,tf/%,egatlovsahcusytitnauqlacisyhpaebircsedot,elpmaxeroF

tupnIgolanAeciveD

.eciveDtramSeeS

lortnoClartneClenaP

eludoMrettimsnarT/revieceR,)MCC(eludoMlortnoClartneCsesuohtahterusolcnenA.seludoMtuptuO,draobrehtoMO/Ilanoitpodna,ylppuSrewoP,)XT/XR(

lortnoClartneC)MCC(eludoM

,tinUgnissecorPlartneCniamehtsniatnoctI.metsysehtfotraehehtsieludomsihTowt,remiTgoDhctaW,kcolCemiTlaeR,yromeMelbammargorP,ylbmessAyalpsiD.syaler"C"mroFowtdnastuptuolangiselbammargorpowt,stroplairesC-232-SR

eciveDlatigiD .s’UCRtuptuOyaleRrotupnItcatnoCasahcus,setatsetercsidowthtiwecivedA

detubirtsiDecnegilletnI

ehtsecudersihT.eciveddlrowlaerlautcaehtotdetubirtsidsirewopgnitupmoC.IFRdnaIMEotytinummiretaerggnidivorpsuht,poolehtnonedrubnoitacinummoc

.levelecivedehttaedamerasnoisicedmralaerP&mralAllA

noitasnepmoCtfirD

noitcetedstiserotsdnaserusaemsrotcetednoitazinoirocirtceleotohpniUPCehTdnaseulavs’yadhcaesegarevaUPCehT.yadrepsemit652eulavrebmahcekoms

gnillorcsaniderotssiegarevayliadehT.syad03rofegarevayliadehtserots.dlosyad03sitahtegarevaehtgnipporddnaegarevas’yadlanifehtgniddanoihsaf

rotcetedehttahtnoitidnoclatnemnorivneeuqinuehttcelferderotseratahtseulavehTahsilbatseotdesusisyad03gnillorcsehtfomusehT.noitarepoyliadnisecneirepxe

tahtsnoitidnoclatnemnorivneeuqinuehtrednunoitcetedekomsroftniopecnereferlatnemnorivnemorfsmralaeslafsecudererutaefsihT.secneirepxerotcetedeht

.ytivitisnesgnicudertuohtiwsecneulfni

ylbmessAyalpsiD

hsup,yalpsidciremunahplaretcarahc08gnitacidnina:sedulcniylbmessayalpsidehT.sutatsmetsysyalpsidots’DELgnitacidnidna,metsysehtlortnocotsehctiwsnottub

ehT sysAGEP ehthtiwsetacinummoctidnaMCCehtnodetnuomsiylbmessayalpsid.eludoMlortnoClartneC

tuptuOtnevE)COE(lortnoC

ehT.stuptuoderisedehtniatbootstupnifogninibmocswollagnimmargorpCOEehT.noitacilppanoisserppus/mralaerifynatsomtiusotelbixelfsiegaugnalCOE

F-2August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

reifitnedIlanretnI)552I-100I(

roF(.stupnifonoitanibmocayfitnediroemanotdesueratahtslobmyS.)100I=4001+1001elpmaxe

draobrehtoMO/I

ehtsahtaht,lenaPlortnoClartneCehtnidetacol,ylbmessalanoitponAlangiS,yaleReraseludoMtuptuOlacipyT.seludoMtuptuOthgierofyticapac

ecafretnItnegilletnIdnatuptuOrotupnIlatigiD,esaeleRtnegA,elbiduA.eludoM

pooLfonoissimoehttahtdedivorphtaptnerrucdesolcagnimrofsehcnarbfotesA

.htapdesolcehtsetanimilehcnarbyna

srotalosIpooLehtnosnoitidnoctrohseriwoteriwtsniaganoitcetorpsedivorphcihwecivedA

)0.7elytSAPFN(otsmrofnoC.enilCPXT/XR

eniLporditluM .tnioplartnecamorfsecivedlarevesgnitcennocretnitiucricroeniL

xelpitluM)27-APFNreP(

.secivederomroenohtiwetacinummocotseriwforiaproknurtenofoesuehTehT sysAGEP .knurtenonoetacinummocotsecived552swolla

yaleRlanoitpOtahtyalerlanoitponahtiwderedroebyamsrotcetedekomsrosecivedtramS

ssecorpycnegreme-nondnasrotavelesahcussecivedlanretxelortnocnac.lortnoc

eludoMtuptuOlaeredivorp,erusolcnelenaPlortnoClartneCehtnidetacol,seludoMtuptuO

:eraseludomlacipyT.eludoMlortnoClartneCehtmorfytilibapactuptuodlrow.elbiduAlangiSdnayaleR

snoitacoLrenwOretcarahc04aerotsotrenwoehtybelbammargorperatahtsnoitacolyromeM

.ecivednoitcetederifehtfonoitacolehtfonoitpircsedciremunahpla

eniLCPoslA.eludoMXT/XRehtmorfgnitanigiroseriwnoitacinummocdnarewoP

.)CLS(tiucriCeniLlangiSdellac

eludoMtuptuOyaleR

tahterusolcnelenaPlortnoClartneCehtnidetacoleludoMtuptuOnAlaudividniruofsniatnoceludomhcaE.tnempiuqeyrailixuahtiwsecafretnituptuOyaleRthgiefolatotA.syalerCDV42pmA2TDPSelbammargorp

.stiucric23folatotarofmetsysehtnidesuebyamseludoM

UCRtuptuOyaleRalortnocottcatnocyalerasedivorptahteciveddleiftramsroelbasserddanA

.xoblacirtceleerauqshcni4anistnuomyllacipyT.nafasahcusecived

tinUlortnoCetomeR)UCR(

.eciveddleiftramsroelbasserddanA

eludoMXT/XRlortnoClartneCehtnidetacolsieludomrettimsnarT/revieceRehT

ehtneewtebecafretninoissimsnartatadasasnoitcnufdnaerusolcnelenaP.)s’UCR(-stinulortnocetomerdnaeludoMlortnoClartneC

tuptuOelbiduAlangiSeludoM

taht,erusolcnelenaPlortnoClartneCehtnidetacol,eludomtuptuonAllA.stiucriclangisdeziraloppmA2,V42,YelytSroZelytSruofsedivorp

thgiefomumixamA.noitidnoctrohsroneponarofdesivrepuserastiucricehtnidellatsniebyamstiucric23htiwseludom sysAGEP .metsys

rotceteDekomStramS

yrevelevelekomserusaem)cirtceleotohpronoitazinoi(srotcetedekomstramSekomsgnitcetedylliatiniretfA.rebmahcgnisnesekomsriehtnihtiwsdnoces9

yrevenoitartnecnocekomsserusaemtierehwetatstrelanasretnerotcetedehtasdnesti,selpmasruoffotuoeerhtekomsstcetedrotcetedehtfI.sdnoces2

.lenaPlortnoClartneCehtotsutatsmralaromrala-erp

eciveDtramS

ehtsahyllanoitiddatubecivedelbasserddanafoserutaefehthtiwecivedAdnanoitarbilacderotsnodesabsnoisicedmralaekamotrewopgnitupmoc

stimsnartecivedehtoslA.rotcetedehtfonoitidnocdna,atadlatnemnorivnenoitazinoirocirtceleotohpebdluowselpmaxE.seulavgolanaseviecerdna

.srotceted

mralAeriFdradnatSeciveD

.knurtxelpitlumehtotyltcerideitotyrassecenscinortceleehttuohtiwecivedAhtiwecafretniotecivedtuptuoelbasserddarotupnielbasserddanaseriuqertI

eht sysAGEP )srotcetedtaehdnaekomslanoitnevnoc..ei(.metsys

F-3 August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

etatSdleifthgieeraerehT.sutatss’UCRnaseifitneditahtyalpsidehtnoedocA

,trobA,elbuorT,mralA:otdemmargorpebyamUCRasetatselbammargorp.lamroNdnayrosivrepuS,wolFretaW,esaeleRlaunaM,mralAlaunaM

rewoPmetsySylppuS

CDedivorp,seirettabyb-dnatS.rewopmetsysyradnocesdnayramirpsedivorPyb-dnatsehT.eruliafrewopCAnafotneveehtniylppuSrewoPehtotegatlov

.erusolcnelenaPlortnoClartneCehtnidetacoleraseirettab

PAT-T .noitarugifnoc4elytSnielbawollaylnO.eniLporditluMeeS

yaleRelbuorT .noitidnocelbuortmetsysynagnirudsetarepohcihwyalerelbammargorpnonA

epyTehT.gnitroperecivedfoepytehtseifitneditahtyalpsidDCLnoegassemA

.secivedUCRtuptuOdnatupnIdnasrotcetedtaeH&ekomSseifitnediegassem

reifitnedIelbairaV .)552I-100I(reifitnedIlanretnIeeS

goDhctaWeludoMremiT

siUPCehtfI.UPCs’eludoMlortnoClartneCehtniytilamronbasesnesremitsihTsemitti,tesertonsiremitehtfI.remitehtsteseryllacidoirepti,yllamrongnitarepo

.rorreUPCasetacidnidnatuo

TF/% .thgilfotoofrepnoitarucsboekomsfotnecreP

F-4August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

(THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)

G-1 August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

APPENDIX GDISPLAY ABBREVIATIONS

Abbreviation Meaning

232 RS-232-C

A.V. Alarm Verification

ACK Acknowledge

ADDR. Address

ALM Alarm

AOF Alarm Off

BAT. Battery

C.L. Combinational Logic

CD Contact Detector Error

CT City Tie

DISCON Disconnect

DISP Panel Display

DR Drift Error

EW EEPROM Write Error

EX External Trouble

INP Input

IT Illegal RCU Type

I/O Input / Output Module

L9 Line + 9V Trouble

LEV. Level

LV Line Voltage Trouble

NA NOV RAM Access Error

NG No good

NR Not Registered

O.L. Owner Location

Abbreviation Meaning

OF Off

OK All Right

OP Open

OR Optional Relay

OUT Output

P.C. Power Communications Line

P.S. Power Supply

P.W. Password

POF Pre-alarm Off

PRE Pre-alarm

PRNT Printer

PROG Program

R.P. Remote Panel

RTC Real Time Control

RY I/O Relay Output Module

SG I/O Signal Output Module

SH Short

SPV Supervisory

TBL Trouble

TE RCU Test No Good

TOF Trouble Off

TST RCU Test

UK Unknown Device Connected

VOLT. Voltage

ZA Zone Alarm

G-2August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

(THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)

H-1 August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

APPENDIX HINDEX

Subject Page Paragraph

AAccessing the System Menus ..........................................................................2-4 ................................................... 2-5.2Active Alarm Mode ............................................................................................2-5 ................................................... 2-6.2Active Supervisory Trouble Mode .....................................................................2-10 ................................................. 2-6.3Active Trouble Mode .........................................................................................2-11 ................................................. 2-6.4Addressable Contact Input Device Installation ..................................................7-11 ................................................. 7-15Addressable Contact Input Devices .................................................................1-5, 3-11 .......................................... 1-2.11,3-3.14Addressable Contact Monitor Registration .......................................................2-14 ................................................. 2-8.7.2Addressable Relay Output Device Installation ..................................................7-11 ................................................. 7-16Addressable Relay Output Devices ..................................................................1-5, 3-12 .......................................... 1-2.12, 3-3.15Addressing I/O Modules ...................................................................................2-13 ................................................. 2-8.4Addressing RCUs.............................................................................................2-13 ................................................. 2-8.6Agent Release Module ......................................................................................3-9, 7-4 ........................................... 3-3.8, 7-7.3Agent Release Output Module ..........................................................................1-4 ................................................... 1-2.7.3Alarm Mode Indications ....................................................................................2-5 ................................................... 2-6.2.1Alarm Mode User Action ...................................................................................2-5 ................................................... 2-6.2.2Alarm Simulation Test (AST) ............................................................................4-2 ................................................... 4-3.5Arming Release Circuits ..................................................................................4-3 ................................................... 4-4.2AST Procedure .................................................................................................4-3 ................................................... 4-3.5.1Audible Device ..................................................................................................2-2 ................................................... 2-2.2

BBasic Motherboard ...........................................................................................1-2 ................................................... 1-2.5Batteries ...........................................................................................................7-6 ................................................... 7-9.2Battery Enclosure .............................................................................................7-6 ................................................... 7-9.1Battery Test ......................................................................................................4-1 ................................................... 4-3.3

CCentral Control Module (CCM) ..........................................................................1-1, 3-2, 5-2 .................................... 1-2.1, 3-3.1, 5-4.2City Tie Module .................................................................................................1-4, 3-10 .......................................... 1-2.7.4, 3-3.9City Tie Output Module .....................................................................................7-4 ................................................... 7-7.4Component Description ....................................................................................1-1 ................................................... 1-2Connecting a Printer .........................................................................................7-11 ................................................. 7-18.2Connecting a Terminal or Personal Computer ..................................................7-11 ................................................. 7-18.1Connecting AC Power ......................................................................................7-6 ................................................... 7-8Connection of Peripherals ................................................................................7-11 ................................................. 7-18Control and Indicator Description .....................................................................2-2 ................................................... 2-2.3Control and Indicators ......................................................................................2-1 ................................................... 2-2

DDefault Passwords ...........................................................................................2-2 ................................................... 2-3.2Detector Installation ..........................................................................................7-10 ................................................. 7-13Detector Registration .......................................................................................2-14 ................................................. 2-8.7.1Disarming and Rearming Release Circuits ......................................................4-3 ................................................... 4-4Disarming Release Circuits .............................................................................4-3 ................................................... 4-4.1Display Control Card (DCC) .............................................................................2-12 ................................................. 2-8.3.3Display Module .................................................................................................1-1 ................................................... 1-2.2

H-2August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

INDEX (Cont.)

Subject Page Paragraph

EEnable/Disable RTC Program Line Numbers ...................................................2-12 ................................................. 2-8.2.2Entering Passwords .........................................................................................2-2 ................................................... 2-3.3EOC Programming ..........................................................................................2-11 ................................................. 2-8.1Exiting the System Menus ................................................................................2-4 ................................................... 2-5.3External Power Failure Indicator Connection ....................................................7-10 ................................................. 7-12

FField Device Connection to RX/TX Module .......................................................7-7 ................................................... 7-10Field Devices ....................................................................................................3-11, 5-3 .......................................... 3-3.10, 5-4.4Functional Descriptions ....................................................................................3-2 ................................................... 3-3

IInput/Output Modules ........................................................................................1-3 ................................................... 1-2.7Install and Connect DC Power .........................................................................7-6 ................................................... 7-9Installation Checkout ........................................................................................7-11 ................................................. 7-17Installation Procedure for Central Control Panel ...............................................7-1 ................................................... 7-3Installation Procedure for Expansion Enclosures .............................................7-1 ................................................... 7-4Installation Procedure for I/O Motherboard .......................................................7-2 ................................................... 7-5Installation Procedure for RX/TX Module ..........................................................7-2 ................................................... 7-6Installation Procedure for I/O Module ................................................................7-3 ................................................... 7-7Intelligent Loop Devices ....................................................................................1-4 ................................................... 1-2.9Isolate Menu Function .......................................................................................2-4 ................................................... 2-5.4.1

LLamp Test .........................................................................................................4-1 ................................................... 4-3.1LCD Display .....................................................................................................2-1 ................................................... 2-2.1Levels of Security .............................................................................................2-2 ................................................... 2-3.1List Menu Function ...........................................................................................2-4 ................................................... 2-5.4.2Listing all Registered RCUs .............................................................................2-15 ................................................. 2-8.7.4Listing EOC Programming ...............................................................................2-12 ................................................. 2-8.1.1Listing I/O Module Assignment .........................................................................2-13 ................................................. 2-8.5.1Listing RTC Programming ................................................................................2-12 ................................................. 2-8.2.1Loop Device Test ..............................................................................................4-1 ................................................... 4-3.2Loop Isolator Devices .......................................................................................1-6 ................................................... 1-2.14Loop Isolator Devices .......................................................................................3-12 ................................................. 3-3.17

MMaintenance Procedures .................................................................................4-1 ................................................... 4-3Materials Required for Installation .....................................................................7-1 ................................................... 7-2Menu Functions ................................................................................................2-4 ................................................... 2-5.4Menu Structure .................................................................................................2-4 ................................................... 2-5.1Mode of Operation ............................................................................................2-1 ................................................... 2-1.1Model DH-2000 Air Duct Housing .....................................................................1-5, 3-12 .......................................... 1-2.13, 3-3.16Modes of Operation ..........................................................................................2-5 ................................................... 2-6Multi-Loop Motherboard ....................................................................................1-3, 3-6 ........................................... 1-2.6, 3-3.5

H-3 August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

INDEX (Cont.)

Subject Page Paragraph

NNormal Standby Mode ......................................................................................2-5 ................................................... 2-6.1

OOutput Signal Connection .................................................................................7-9 ................................................... 7-11Overall Block Diagram Description ..................................................................3-1 ................................................... 3-2

PParts List ..........................................................................................................6-1 ................................................... 6Power-Down Procedure ...................................................................................4-3 ................................................... 4-5.1Power-Down System .......................................................................................4-3 ................................................... 4-5Power-Up Procedure ........................................................................................4-4 ................................................... 4-6.1Power-Up System ............................................................................................4-4 ................................................... 4-6Power Checks ..................................................................................................5-1 ................................................... 5-2.2Power Supply Communication Connections ....................................................7-6 ................................................... 7-7.7Power Supply/Charger Assembly .....................................................................1-2, 7-4 ........................................... 1-2.4, 7-7.5Power Supply/Charger Assembly, Expansion Enclosure .................................7-4 ................................................... 7-7.6Power Supply/Charger Assembly, Revision A ..................................................3-4 ................................................... 3-3.3Power Supply/Charger Assembly, Revision C ..................................................3-5 ................................................... 3-3.4Printing Operation .............................................................................................2-11 ................................................. 2-7

RReceiver/Transmitter (RX/TX) Module ..............................................................1-2, 3-3 ........................................... 1-2.3, 3-3.2Registering I/O Module Assignments ...............................................................2-13 ................................................. 2-8.5Registering RCUs ............................................................................................2-14 ................................................. 2-8.7Relay Output Module ........................................................................................1-3, 3-8, 7-4 .................................... 1-2.7.2, 3-3.7,.................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-7.2

Remote Control Unit (RCU) .............................................................................2-12 ................................................ 2-8.3.2Remote Relay Registration ..............................................................................2-15 ................................................ 2-8.7.3Removal and Replacement .............................................................................5-2 .................................................. 5-4Required Tools ................................................................................................5-2 .................................................. 5-4.1RTC Programming ...........................................................................................2-12 ................................................ 2-8.2RX/TX Loops ....................................................................................................2-13 ................................................ 2-8.3.4RX/TX Module .................................................................................................5-2 .................................................. 5-4.3

SScheduled Maintenance ..................................................................................4-1 .................................................. 4-2Set Menu Function ..........................................................................................2-4 .................................................. 2-5.4.3Setting and Adjusting Smoke & Heat Detector Sensitivities ...........................7-10 ................................................ 7-14Setting and Adjusting Smoke & Heat Detector Sensitivity Procedure ............7-10 ................................................ 7-14.1Signal Audible Output Module .........................................................................7-3 .................................................. 7-7.1Signal Output Module ......................................................................................1-3, 3-7 ........................................... 1-2.7.1, 3-3.6SmartOne Detector Bases ...............................................................................1-5 .................................................. 1-2.10SmartOne Heat Detectors ...............................................................................1-5, 3-11 ......................................... 1-2.9.3, 3-3.13SmartOne Ionization Detectors ........................................................................1-4, 3-11 ......................................... 1-2.9.1, 3-3.11SmartOne Photoelectric Detectors ..................................................................1-5, 3-11 ......................................... 1-2.9.2, 3-3.12Standard Fault Isolation Techniques ...............................................................5-1 .................................................. 5-2Standby Batteries ............................................................................................1-4 .................................................. 1-2.8Supervisory Trouble Mode Indication ..............................................................2-10 ................................................ 2-6.3.1

H-4August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

INDEX (Cont.)

Subject Page Paragraph

Supervisory Trouble Mode User Action .............................................................2-10 ................................................. 2-6.3.2System Components .......................................................................................1-1 ................................................... 1-1.2System Description ..........................................................................................1-1 ................................................... 1-1.1System I/O Modules .........................................................................................2-13 ................................................. 2-8.3.5System Inputs ...................................................................................................2-12 ................................................. 2-8.3.1System Menus ..................................................................................................2-4 ................................................... 2-5System Outputs ...............................................................................................2-13 ................................................. 2-8.3.4System Power-Up ............................................................................................2-2 ................................................... 2-4System Programming ......................................................................................2-11 ................................................. 2-8System Security ...............................................................................................2-2 ................................................... 2-3System Specification ........................................................................................1-6 ................................................... 1-3

TTest Menu Function ..........................................................................................2-4 ................................................... 2-5.4.4Trouble Mode Indications ..................................................................................2-11 ................................................. 2-6.4.1Trouble Mode User Action .................................................................................2-11 ................................................. 2-6.4.2Troubleshooting ................................................................................................5-1 ................................................... 5-3Troubleshooting and Corrective Maintenance ...................................................5-1 ................................................... 5Types of Inputs and Outputs .............................................................................2-12 ................................................. 2-8.3

UUn-registering RCUs ........................................................................................2-15 ................................................. 2-8.7.5

VVisual Inspection ..............................................................................................5-1 ................................................... 5-2.1

WWalk Test ..........................................................................................................4-2 ................................................... 4-3.4Walk Test Procedure ........................................................................................4-2 ................................................... 4-3.4.2Walk Testing Detectors ....................................................................................4-2 ................................................... 4-3.4.1Wiring the RX/TX PC Line ................................................................................7-7 ................................................... 7-10.1

I-1 August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

APPENDIX ISYSTEM DRAWINGS

This appendix provides installation diagrams and instructions for various PEGAsys system modules.

COMPONENT DRAWING No. PAGE No.

Central Control Module 06-235443-001 I-2

Receiver/Transmitter Module 06-235443-002 I-6

Power Supply Module (Revision XC) 06-235443-003 I-8

Power Supply Module (Revision AC) 06-235443-003 I-9

Agent Release Module 06-235443-005 I-11

Signal Audible Module 06-235443-006 I-14

Relay Output Module 06-235443-007 I-17

City Tie Module 06-235443-008 I-18

Basic I/O Motherboard 06-235443-011 I-20

Multi-Loop Motherboard 06-235443-012 I-22

Addressable Input Device 06-234563-001 I-24

Addressable Output Device 06-234563-001 I-25

Addressable Input Device New Design I-26

Addressable Output Device New Design I-27

I-2August 1999

76-100016-001

PEGA

sysIntelligent Suppression C

ontrol/Fire Alarm System

0V

DISPLAY PORT

JK

1

JK

2

PL

G2

PL

G1

JK

3P

LG

6

SW

1

PL

G2

PL

G3

PORT

PROCESSORPORT

PRINTDISP

PORT PORT

JK1JK2

5V24V 0V

TO REMOTE PCFOR PROGRAMMING

TO EXTERNAL PRINTER OR INTELLIGENT GRAPHIC ANNUNCIATOR

PLG1P.C.

DISPLAY RESET

DISPLAY5V

JK3

1

BT1

JP2

PLG2

CCM RESET

SOUNDER 2

JP4

BUTTOM

SW1

JP3

TB4 TB5

SOUNDER 1

RE

P1

- -

A

+ +

B

RE

P2

-

A

+

JP1

C

VOLT FREE RELAYS

TB1 TB2

-

B

+ NO NOCNC

1

NC

2

TB3

FAULT

V/F RELAY

NCNO C

24VDC FROMPOWER SUPPLY

TB

6

24VDC FROMPOWER SUPPLY

FLT

EA

RT

HF

LT

SU

PP

LY

SU

PP

LY

0V

24

V

TB6

IC1

JK4

PO

RT

JK5

I/O

PO

RT

CONTROLLER

POWER SUPPLIESTO I/O MODULES AN

LOOPTO RX/TX

DISPLAY ASSEMBLY

RX

/TX

SEE NOTE 1SEE NOTE 1

SEE NOTE 1

SEE NOTE 1

TITLEInstallation W

iring Diagram

CC

M/

Display & C

ontrol Assembly

(PEGAsys)

DR

AWIN

G N

o.06-235443-001R

EVISION

ADSHEET

1 of 4

I-3August 1999

76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm

SystemPEG

Asys

TITLEInstallation W

iring Diagram

CC

M/

Display & C

ontrol Assembly

(PEGAsys)

DR

AWIN

G N

o.06-235443-001R

EVISION

ADSHEET

2 of 4

18 AWG

800

220

340

3. ALL RELAY OUTPUTS (VOLT/FREE RELAYS AND V/F RELAY) ARE RATED

BETWEEN THE CONTROL HEAD AND THE CONTROL PANEL TERMINAL

6. TO GUARANTEE THE REQUIRED VOLTAGE AT THE RELEASING DEVICE, THE

EX: TO DETERMINE THE TOTAL LOOP LENGTH, MEASURE THE DISTANCE

2. SOUNDER/RELEASE CIRCUITS ARE RATED AT 24VDC, 2A POWER LIMITED.

370

"ON" TIME

CONTINUOUS

CONTINUOUS

CONTINUOUS

MOMENTARY

CONTINUOUS

MOMENTARY

CONTINUOUS

GROUP

700 mA

458 mA

I max.

240 mA

7. RELEASING OUTPUT DEVICES SPECIFICATION

420 mA

B,DSOLENOID

GROUP E,G

890181

486500

FM

897494

899175

DEVICE

2.4 A

A

1.5 A

2.4 A

57 OHM

760

RESISTANCE (min.)

10 OHM

34 OHM

52 OHM

103 OHM

15.9 OHM

10.8 OHM

1570E,G 525

4. SIGNAL OUTPUT REQUIRE THE USE OF END OF LINE RESISTOR (EOR) -

SUPERVISORY CURRENT - 2.4mA/CIRCUIT

FOLLOWING TABLE SHALL BE USED.

BLOCK, THEN MULTIPLY BY TWO.

RELEASING

DEVICE

SOLENOID

486500

897494

FM

890181

PART NO.

899175

AT 30VDC, 1A.

10K, 0.5W; NOT SUPPLIED WITH PANEL.

200

200

2000

240

500

760

WIRE LENGTH (FT.)

14 AWG

3000

940

1440

380

A

B,D

300

300

12 AWG

1200

150

300

480

120

120

16 AWG

1. JUMPER ARRANGEMENTS FOR SOUNDER 1

SIGNAL SOUNDER AGENT RELEASE

JP1

JP4

JP2

JP3

NOTES:

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

FAULT RELAYVOLT FREE RELAYS

C

(PROGRAMMABLE)

NO NC TB1, TB2

V / F RELAY

FAULT

NO NC C TB3

- FOR POWER LIMITED CIRCUITS.

- FOR SUPERVISED CIRCUITS.

8. RELEASING OUTPUT DEVICES

REFER TO FENWAL DATA SHEETS

POSITION OF RELAY OUTPUTS DURING NORMAL STANDBY MODE.

9. FOR SPECIFIC SIGNAL DEVICE INFORMATION

SOLENOIDS

75.XXX

L

S

A,B,D,E,G

SOLENOIDS

SPRINKLER

FM GROUPS

486500

899175

897494

890181

AVAILABLE AS PART NO. 06-129520-001 (KIT OF 50).

MAXIMUM OF ONE #12 AWG WIRE PER TERMINAL.

120300 200895630

12 OHM2.0 A895630 MOMENTARY

895630

486500-01

800486500-01 20003000 1200

CONTINUOUS240 mA486500-01 103 OHM

NOTE: THE TROUBLE RELAY CONTACTS

ARE SHOWN IN THE UNPOWERED STATE.

5. IF MP01 IS CONFIGURED AS A RELEASING OUTPUT,

A 220 OHM (5W MIN.) RESISTOR COULD BE USED TO SIMULATE

THE CIRCUIT IF NO SOLENOID IS CONNECTED.

CAUTION: DO NOT USE RESISTOR IF SOLENOID IS CONNECTED.

I-4August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

TITLEInstallation Wiring Diagram CCM/Display & Control Assembly(PEGAsys)DRAWING No.06-235443-001REVISIONADSHEET3 of 4

I-5 August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

TITLEInstallation Wiring Diagram CCM/Display & Control Assembly(PEGAsys)DRAWING No.06-235443-001REVISIONADSHEET4 of 4

I-6August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

RS

232

PO

RT

FO

RC

OM

MU

NIC

AT

ION

WIT

HC

CM

.

NO

TE

S:

1.

SM

AR

TD

EV

ICE

SM

AY

UT

ILIZ

ET

-TA

PW

IRIN

GM

ET

HO

DIN

ST

YLE

4C

ON

FIG

UR

AT

ION

ON

LY.

2.

4.

AR

RA

NG

EM

EN

TS

FO

RP

CLIN

EW

IRIN

G

PL

UG

INT

HE

LO

OP

ISO

LA

TO

R(R

XT

X)

74

-20

00

12

-00

1

AN

DIN

TE

RC

ON

NE

CT

ITU

SIN

GF

LE

XC

AB

LE

ST

OJ3

ON

RX

TX

.M

AK

ES

UR

ET

HA

TU

NE

VE

NP

INS

AR

E

SIG

NA

LIN

GLIN

EC

IRC

UIT

CH

AR

AC

TE

RIS

TIC

S

MA

XV

OLTA

GE

:

MIN

.V

OLTA

GE

:

MA

X.

LIN

EC

AP

AC

ITA

NC

E:

MA

X.

LIN

ER

ES

ISTA

NC

E:

MA

X.

NU

MB

ER

OF

RC

U'S

:M

AX

.R

IPP

LE

VO

LTA

GE

:

26

.4V

DC

19

.0V

DC

1.0

uF

26.0

OH

MS

25

5100

mV

RM

S

SM

AR

TD

ET

EC

TO

RS

US

ED

:

PR

OD

UC

TN

O'S

.7

0-4

01

00

1-0

00

70

-40

10

04

-00

0

71

-40

10

01

-00

0

71

-40

10

04

-00

0

70

-40

20

01

-10

0

71

-40

20

01

-10

0

70

-40

40

01

-10

0

CO

NTA

CT

INP

UT

DE

VIC

ES

:

70

-40

70

04

-00

1

70

-40

70

03

-00

1

70

-40

70

02

-00

XP

RO

DU

CT

NO

'S.

RE

LA

YO

UT

PU

TD

EV

ICE

S:

70

-40

80

03

-00

0

70

-40

80

02

-00

0P

RO

DU

CT

NO

.'S

LE

D1

-R

ED

LE

DIN

DIC

AT

ES

RX

TX

RE

SE

TW

HE

NO

N.

LE

D2

-G

RE

EN

LE

DIN

DIC

AT

ES

NO

RM

AL

OP

ER

AT

ION

OF

RX

TX

PC

LIN

E

TR

AN

SM

ITT

ER

WH

EN

BLIN

KIN

G.

SW

1-

CP

UR

ES

ET.

SW

2-

PC

LIN

ER

ES

T/

DIS

CO

NN

EC

T24V

FR

OM

TE

RM

.2

&3.

LO

OP

ISO

LA

TO

RS

:

PR

OD

UC

TN

O.'S

RX

TX

74

-20

00

12

-00

1

EL

EC

T.

BO

X7

4-2

00

01

2-0

02

BA

SE

MO

UN

T7

4-2

00

01

2-0

04

MO

DU

LE

T1

KIDDE-FENWAL,INC.

RX/TX

76-100005-001

LE

D1

LE

D2

SW

2

SW

1 T1

J2

J1

121 J3

74

-20

00

12

-00

1

TO

FU

LLY

UT

ILIZ

ELO

OP

ISO

LA

TIO

NF

UN

CT

ION

.

ST

YLE

6(4

-WIR

E)

PC

LIN

EC

ON

FIG

UR

AT

ION

ISR

EC

OM

ME

ND

ED

CA

NB

EIN

STA

LLE

DO

NP

CLIN

E.

NO

MO

RE

TH

AN

30

LO

OP

MA

XIM

UM

20

LO

OP

ISO

LA

TO

RS

EX

CLU

DIN

GO

NE

ON

RX

/TX

3.

FR

OM

PO

WE

R24

VD

C

SU

PP

LY RX

/TX

CP

UR

ES

ET

PC

LIN

EN

OR

MA

L

CP

UR

ES

ET

PC

LIN

ER

ES

ET

RX

/TX

AS

SE

MB

LY

74

-20

00

05

-00

1

ASHLAND,MA01721

SHORT-2SHORT-1

RX

/TX

LO

OP

ISO

LA

TO

R

J3

JP

2JP

3

LO

OP

ISO

LA

TO

R

SE

EN

OT

E4

W2

W1

SE

EN

OT

E4

3 4421

MA

XIM

UM

OF

255

LO

OP

DE

VIC

ES

PE

RR

X/T

X

LO

OP.

AN

YC

OM

BIN

AT

ION

OF

DE

VIC

ET

YP

E

ISA

CC

EP

TA

BLE

.

DE

VIC

ES

BE

TW

EE

NT

WO

AD

JA

CE

NT

LO

OP

ISO

LA

TO

RS

.

5.

MA

XIM

UM

OF

ON

E#12

AW

GW

IRE

PE

RT

ER

MIN

AL.

JU

MP

ER

W1

&W

2

JP

3

JP

2

ININ

OP

EN

ST

YLE

4

OP

EN

OU

T

OP

EN

OU

T

SH

OR

TE

DS

HO

RT

ED

ST

YLE

6w

/LO

OP

ISO

.S

TY

LE

7

4.1

-S

TY

LE

SE

VE

N(7

)R

EQ

UIR

ES

TH

EU

SE

OF

LO

OP

ISO

LA

TO

RS

,T

HE

RX

TX

MO

DU

LE

RE

QU

IRE

ST

HE

US

E

OF

ON

E(1

)P

/N7

4-2

00

01

2-0

01

ISO

LA

TO

RM

OD

UL

E

TO

OP

ER

AT

EIN

TH

ES

TY

LE

7C

ON

FIG

UR

AT

ION

.

4.2

-W

HE

NLO

OP

ISO

LA

TO

RU

SE

D:

INT

ER

CO

NN

EC

TE

D.

24

VD

C

(RE

D)

RE

T

(BL

K)

(OP

TIO

NA

L)

70

-40

30

01

-XX

X

70

-40

70

08

-00

2

70

-40

70

08

-00

1

70

-40

80

04

-00

1

PR

OD

UC

TN

O.

89

-10

00

81

-00

1

AN

AL

AS

ER

INT

ER

FA

CE

MO

DU

LE

ST

YL

E6

SH

OR

TE

D

IN IN

TITLEInstallation Wiring DiagramReceiver/Transmitter Module(PEGAsys)DRAWING No.06-235443-002REVISIONACSHEET1 of 2

I-7 August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

TITLEInstallation Wiring DiagramReceiver/Transmitter Module(PEGAsys)DRAWING No.06-235443-002REVISIONACSHEET2 of 2

I-8August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

TITLEInstallation Wiring DiagramPower Supply(PEGAsys)DRAWING No.06-235443-003REVISIONXCSHEET1 of 1

I-9 August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

TITLEInstallation Wiring DiagramPower Supply(PEGAsys)DRAWING No.06-235443-003REVISIONACSHEET1 of 2

I-10August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

TITLEInstallation Wiring DiagramPower Supply(PEGAsys)DRAWING No.06-235443-003REVISIONACSHEET2 of 2

24V

RET

AC

OU

T1

AC

IN2

24V

RET

NL

NL

N

DC

IN1

LG

DC

IN2

SPV

SPV

SHARE

WH

T

BLK

/WH

T

BLK

BLK

VIO

RE

DR

ED

OR

N

WH

T

BLK

/WH

T

OR

N

RE

D BLK VIO

BLK

RE

D

MA

INP

OW

ER

SU

PP

LY

AU

XIL

IAR

YP

OW

ER

SU

PP

LY

I-11 August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

TITLEInstallation Wiring DiagramRelease Module(PEGAsys)DRAWING No.06-235443-005REVISIONADSHEET1 of 3

I-12August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

TITLEInstallation Wiring DiagramRelease Module(PEGAsys)DRAWING No.06-235443-005REVISIONADSHEET2 of 3

(U.L

.LIS

TE

D)

(U.L

.LIS

TE

D)

2.M

AX

IMU

MC

IRC

UIT

WIR

ING

RE

SIS

TA

NC

E

IST

OB

E0.7

OH

MS

.

1.S

WIT

CH

S1

AT

"SO

L"

PO

SIT

ION

.S

WIT

CH

S3,1

TO

"OF

F".

SO

LE

NO

IDP

AR

TN

O.897494

SO

LE

NO

IDP

AR

TN

O.486500,486500-0

1

+24V

AU

XIL

AR

YP

OW

ER

CO

NN

EC

TIO

N

2.M

AX

IMU

MC

IRC

UIT

WIR

ING

RE

SIS

TA

NC

E

IST

OB

E6.0

OH

MS

.

WH

EN

AU

XIL

AR

YP

OW

ER

US

ED

.

JU

MP

ER

SW

1&

W2

TO

BE

RE

MO

VE

D

1.S

WIT

CH

S1

AT

"SO

L"

PO

SIT

ION

.S

WIT

CH

S3,1

TO

"OF

F".

CK

T#1

(U.L

.LIS

TE

D)

SO

LE

NO

IDP

AR

TN

O.890181

AN

D895630

SO

LE

NO

IDP

AR

TN

O.899175

TB

1

CK

T#2

1.S

WIT

CH

S1

AT

"SO

L"

PO

SIT

ION

.S

WIT

CH

S3,1

TO

"OF

F".

2.M

AX

IMU

MC

IRC

UIT

WIR

ING

RE

SIS

TA

NC

EIS

TO

BE

0.6

OH

MS

.

2.M

AX

IMU

MC

IRC

UIT

WIR

ING

RE

SIS

TA

NC

EIS

TO

BE

0.6

OH

MS

.

1.S

WIT

CH

S1

AT

"SO

L"

PO

SIT

ION

.S

WIT

CH

S3,1

TO

"OF

F".

NO

TE

S:

SA

FE

TY

FU

SE

WH

T

SO

LE

NO

IDYE

L

SIN

GLE

SO

LE

NO

ID

MIC

RO

SW

ITC

H

BLU

SNO

TE

S:

1

BLK

6

3

CO

NT

RO

LH

EA

D

SIN

GLE

S

2

54321

TB

1

4W

HT

WH

T

BLU

654

S

YE

L

BLK

YE

LB

LK

NO

TE

:

NO

TE

S:

654S

RE

T.

65

CK

T#2

TW

OS

OLE

NO

IDS

BLU

321

S

1

BLK

TB

1

6

DA

UL

CO

NT

RO

LH

EA

D

SS

2

1

3

23

54321

CK

T#1

TB

1

RE

D321

NO

TE

S: SIN

GLE

SO

LE

NO

IDT

B1

3216

S

542 31

SIN

GLE

SO

LE

NO

IDT

B1

SIG

NA

LC

IRC

UIT

S

410

RE

D

BLK

2

TB

1

1

CK

T#2

S

6511

12

CK

T#2

+-+

CK

T#2

BLK

RE

D

TW

OS

OLE

NO

IDS

CK

T#1

S

TB

1

321

6

TW

OS

OLE

NO

IDS

TB

1

CK

T#1

542 31

TB

1

987

CK

T#1

CK

T#2

-+-

S

10K

EO

R

L

SS

10K

EO

R

L10K

EO

R

L

S S

L L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

LL L

+

-

--+

+ -+ -

+ -+ -

+ -+ -

+ -+ -

+ -+ -

+ - + -

+ -+ -

I-13 August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

TITLEInstallation Wiring DiagramRelease Module(PEGAsys)DRAWING No.06-235371-005REVISIONADSHEET3 of 3

1.S

WIT

CH

S1

AT

"SO

L"

PO

SIT

ION

.S

WIT

CH

S3,1

TO

"OF

F".

IST

OB

E2.5

OH

MS

.

2.M

AX

IMU

MC

IRC

UIT

WIR

ING

RE

SIS

TA

NC

E

GR

OU

PE

,G

GR

OU

PB

,D

1.S

WIT

CH

S1

AT

"SO

L"

PO

SIT

ION

.S

WIT

CH

S3,1

TO

"OF

F".

IST

OB

E1.5

OH

MS

.

2.M

AX

IMU

MC

IRC

UIT

WIR

ING

RE

SIS

TA

NC

E

(U.L

.LIS

TE

D)

(U.L

.LIS

TE

D)

1.S

WIT

CH

S1

AT

"SO

L"

PO

SIT

ION

.S

WIT

CH

S3,1

TO

"OF

F".

2.M

AX

IMU

MC

IRC

UIT

WIR

ING

RE

SIS

TA

NC

EIS

TO

BE

2.3

OH

MS

.

CK

T#2GR

OU

PA

(U.L

.LIS

TE

D)

CK

T#1

NO

TE

S:

6542 31

TB

1

4

NO

TE

S:

S

65

CK

T#2

6542 31

CK

T#1

TB

1

SIN

GLE

SO

LE

NO

ID

NO

TE

S:

TB

1

3216

SIN

GLE

SO

LE

NO

ID

S

54321

TB

1

4

CK

T#2

S

65

TW

OS

OLE

NO

IDS

CK

T#1

S

TB

1

3216

TW

OS

OLE

NO

IDS

SS

TB

1

54321

FM

GR

OU

PS

PR

INK

LE

RS

OLE

NO

IDS

S

SIN

GLE

SO

LE

NO

ID

SS

TW

OS

OLE

NO

IDS

CK

T#1

CK

T#2

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

+ -+ -

+ -+ -

+ -

+ -+ -

+ -+ - + -

+ -

+ -

+ -

I-14August 1999

76-100016-001

PEGA

sysIntelligent Suppression C

ontrol/Fire Alarm System

TITLEInstallation W

iring Diagram

Signal Audible Module

(PEGAsys)

DR

AWIN

G N

o.06-235443-006R

EVISION

ACSHEET

1 of 3

NOTES:

3. SIGNAL OUTPUT REQUIRE THE USE OF END OF LINE

2. NOMINAL VOLTAGE 24.0 VDC

1. MAXIMUM OUTPUT CURRENTS:

4. MODULE ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT76-1

00003-0

01

12

TB1

1

ONLY POLARIZED SIGNALLING DEVICES TO BE USED.

- FOR POWER LIMITED CIRCUITS

7. - FOR SUPERVISED CIRCUITS

REFER TO FENWAL DATA SHEETS 75.XXX

6. FOR SPECIFIC SIGNAL DEVICE INFORMATION

S

SW1,2

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ONONON1

8

7

5

3

4

2

6

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

MODULE

ADDRESS SW2,2 SW1,1

L

RESISTOR (EOR) - 10K, 0.5W; NOT SUPPLIED WITH

SUPERVISORY CURRENT - 2.4 mA/CIRCUIT

SIGNAL CIRCUIT - 2.0 A

34

56

78

91

011

12

12AUXILIARY

POWER

SOUNDER

CIRCUITS

RESET SWITCH

TROUBLE LED

8. JUMPERS W9 & W10 MUST BE CUT OUT

WHEN AUXILIARY POWER INPUT IS USED.

NOT USED

SWITCH POSITION

9. MAXIMUM OF 8 MODULES PER SYSTEM.

5. EITHER SOUNDER OUTPUT (2) MAY BE CONFIGURED

FOR EITHER 2 STYLE "Y" OR 1 STYLE "Z", USING

JUMPER AND DIP SWITCH SETTINGS SHOWN ON SHEETS 2 & 3.

11

2

KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.

06-129569-001

ASHLAND, MA 01721ASHLAND, MA 01721

SIGNAL AUDIBLE MODULESIGNAL AUDIBLE MODULE

ON

21 MODULE ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT

SEE NOTE 4

12

12

SEE NOTE 8

1 - 4

PANEL. AVAILABLE AS PART NO. 06-129520-001

(KIT OF 50).

10. MAXIMUM OF ONE #12 AWG WIRE PER TERMINAL.

SEE NOTE 5

SIG

.A

UD

.

I-15August 1999

76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm

SystemPEG

Asys

TITLEInstallation W

iring Diagram

Signal Audible Module

(PEGAsys)

DR

AWIN

G N

o.06-235443-006R

EVISION

ACSHEET

2 of 3

5

8

7

6

TB1

12

11

10

9

EOR EOR

EOREOR

L S L S

SLL S

11

12

9

10

7

8

5

TB1

6

EOR

EOR

SL

EOR

L S

4 STYLE "Y" 2 STYLE "Y" AND 1 STYLE "Z"

W1

ON

JUMPERS

W2

ON ON

W3

OFF

W4 W8

OFFON ON ON

W5 W6 W7

ON

SW2,1

ON

SW3,2

SWITCHES

OFF

W4

JUMPERS

ON ON ON

W1 W2 W3

OFFOFF OFF ON ON OFF

SW2,1

SWITCHES

W7W5 W6 W8 SW3,2

AUXILIARY POWER CONNECTION

2

1

TB1

RET

+24VDC

AUXILIARY

POWER

CIRCUIT 2

CIRCUIT 1

CIRCUIT 3

CIRCUIT 4 L S

CIRCUIT 2

CIRCUIT 3

CIRCUIT 1

10K

10K 10K

-

-

+

+

-

-

+

+

10K 10K

-

-

+

+

-

-

+

+

10K

10K

I-16August 1999

76-100016-001

PEGA

sysIntelligent Suppression C

ontrol/Fire Alarm System

TITLEInstallation W

iring Diagram

Signal Audible Module

(PEGAsys)

DR

AWIN

G N

o.06-235443-006R

EVISION

ACSHEET

3 of 3

L S

L S

12

9

10

11

8

7

6

5

TB1

EOR

SL

EOR

L

12

S

9

10

11

8

7

6

5

TB1

2 STYLE "Z"

L S

1 STYLE "Z" AND 2 STYLE "Y"

ON

W4

JUMPERS

OFF OFF OFF

W1 W2 W3

OFFOFF OFF ON OFF OFF

SW2,1

SWITCHES

W7W5 W6 W8 SW3,2

SWITCHES

SW2,1

ONOFF OFF OFF ONON ON OFF OFF

JUMPERS

W4W1 W2 W3 W7W5 W6 W8

ON

SW3,2

CIRCUIT 3

CIRCUIT 1

CIRCUIT 4

CIRCUIT 3

CIRCUIT 1

10KEOR

EOR10K

-

-

+

+

-

-

+

+ +

+

-

-

+

+

-

-

10KEOR

10K10K

I-17 August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

TITLEInstallation Wiring DiagramRelay Output Module(PEGAsys)DRAWING No.06-235443-007REVISIONABSHEET1 of 1

RELAY76-10004-001

I-18August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

TITLEInstallation Wiring DiagramCity Tie Module(PEGAsys)DRAWING No.06-235443-008REVISIONABSHEET1 of 2

CITY TIE76-100002-001

I-19 August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

TITLEInstallation Wiring DiagramCity Tie Module(PEGAsys)DRAWING No.06-235443-008REVISIONABSHEET2 of 2

I-20August 1999

76-100016-001

PEGA

sysIntelligent Suppression C

ontrol/Fire Alarm System

NOTE:

1). TB1 BRINGS 24VDC POWER FROM POWER SUPPLY

TB5 OR TB6 TERMINAL BLOCKS.

2). 24VDC POWER TO RX/TX MODULES (J1) FROM TB5 OR TB6 ON POWER SUPPLY.

3). TERMINAL TB1 CAN BE USED TO BRING POWER TO I/O MODULES IN THE AUXILIARY BOX.

1. POWER CONNECTIONS:1.

2. COMMUNICATIONS:

1). J9 CONNECTS TO CCM PORT AND PROVIDES I/O MODULES WITH RS485 COMMUNICATIONS.

2). J1 THROUGH J8 TO BE USED TO PLUG IN I/O MODULES AND SUPPLY THEM WITH +24VDC

POWER AND RS485 COMMUNICATIONS.

3). RS232 COMMUNICATIONS FOR RX/TX MODULE TO BE PROVIDED THROUGH PHONE CABLE

PLUGGED INTO "RX/TX" PORT ON CCM.

1. USE RED WIRES FOR +24VDC AND BLACK FOR RET.

2. JUMPER JP1 SHOULD BE IN. MAKE SURE THAT JUMPER

W4 ON POWER SUPPLY CONTROL BOARD IS OUT.

4). TB2 TO BE USED TO INTERCONNECT TO AUXILIARY PANELS' MOTHER BOARD AND POWER

SUPPLIES TO PROVIDE RS485 COMMUNICATIONS.

J9RS-485

+24V

485B

485A

SIG. GND

COM. ALM.

COM. TBL.

RET

I/O MOTHER BOARD

KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.ASHLAND, MA 01721

C

J2J1 J3 J6 J7 J8J4

R1

J5

JP1

Tb2

Tb1

Rv2

Rv1

TITLEInstallation W

iring Diagram

Basic I/0 Motherboard

(PEGAsys)

DR

AWIN

G N

o.06-235443-011R

EVISION

ABSHEET

1 of 2

I-21 August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

TITLEInstallation Wiring DiagramBasic I/0 Motherboard(PEGAsys)DRAWING No.06-235443-011REVISIONABSHEET2 of 2

RX

/TX

MO

DU

LE

MO

DU

LE

I/O

TO

CC

MR

X/T

XP

OR

T

TO

CC

MI/O

PO

RT

TO

PO

WE

RS

UP

PLY

I-22August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

TITLEInstallation Wiring DiagramMulti-Loop I/0 Motherboard(PEGAsys)DRAWING No.06-235443-012REVISIONABSHEET1 of 2

MODULES

I/O

+2

4V

RE

T

+24V

+24V

+24V

+24V

+24V

+24V

+24V

+2

4V

+24V

RET

RET

RET

RET

RET

RET

RET

RE

T

RET

CO

M.

TB

L.

CO

M.

AL

M.

SIG

.G

ND

48

5A

48

5B

RS

48

5

MU

LT

ILO

OP

CO

NT

RO

LL

ER

/MO

TH

ER

BO

AR

D

AS

HL

AN

D,

MA

01

72

1K

IDD

E-F

EN

WA

L,

INC

.

NO

TE

:

1).

TB

9A

ND

TB

11

BR

ING

24V

DC

PO

WE

RF

RO

M

PO

WE

RS

UP

PLY

TB

5A

ND

TB

6.

2).

TB

1T

HR

OU

GH

TB

8T

OB

EU

SE

DT

OC

ON

NE

CT

24V

DC

PO

WE

RT

OR

X/T

XM

OD

ULE

S(J

1).

3).

TE

RM

INA

LT

B9

CA

NB

EU

SE

DT

OB

RIN

GP

OW

ER

TO

I/O

MO

DU

LE

SIN

TH

EA

UX

ILIA

RY

BO

X.

1.P

OW

ER

CO

NN

EC

TIO

NS

:1.

2.C

OM

MU

NIC

AT

ION

S:

1).

JP

0C

ON

NE

CT

ST

OC

CM

MO

DU

LE

AN

DS

UP

PLIE

SR

S232

CO

MM

UN

ICA

TIO

NF

OR

RX

/TX

MO

DU

LE

S.

2).

JP

1T

HR

OU

GH

JP

8T

OB

EC

ON

NE

CT

ED

TO

RX

/TX

MO

DU

LE

S'J

2C

ON

NE

CT

OR

ST

O

PR

OV

IDE

RS

232

CO

MM

UN

ICA

TIO

NS

.

3).

JP

9C

ON

NE

CT

ST

OC

CM

PO

RT

AN

DP

RO

VID

ES

I/O

MO

DU

LE

SW

ITH

RS

485

CO

MM

UN

ICA

TIO

NS

.

4).

J1

TH

RO

UG

HJ7

TO

BE

US

ED

TO

PLU

GIN

I/O

MO

DU

LE

SA

ND

SU

PP

LY

TH

EM

WIT

H+

24V

DC

PO

WE

RA

ND

RS

485

CO

MM

UN

ICA

TIO

NS

.

5).

TB

10

TO

BE

US

ED

TO

INT

ER

CO

NN

EC

TT

OA

UX

ILIA

RY

PA

NE

LS

'MO

TH

ER

BO

AR

DA

ND

PO

WE

R

SU

PP

LIE

ST

OP

RO

VID

ER

S485

CO

MM

UN

ICA

TIO

NS

.

1.U

SE

RE

DW

IRE

SF

OR

+24V

DC

AN

DB

LA

CK

FO

RR

ET.

2.IN

STA

LL

TH

EW

1JU

MP

ER

IFT

HE

MO

TH

ER

BO

AR

DIS

HO

OK

ED

AS

TH

E

LA

ST

DE

VIC

EO

NT

HE

RS

-485

I/O

BU

S,R

EM

OV

ET

HE

JU

MP

ER

OT

HE

RW

ISE

.

3.T

HE

FIR

ST

RX

/TX

MO

DU

LE

(LO

OP

#1)

SH

OU

LD

BE

ALW

AY

SO

N

TH

EFA

RR

IGH

TA

ND

INT

ER

CO

NN

EC

TE

DT

OJP

1A

ND

TB

1.

ALL

CO

NS

EC

UT

IVE

RX

/TX

MO

DU

LE

SS

HO

ULD

BE

PLU

GG

ED

FR

OM

RIG

HT

TO

LE

FT

STA

RT

ING

FR

OM

TH

EF

IRS

TR

X/T

X.

(CO

NN

EC

TO

RN

UM

BE

RIS

AS

SO

CIA

TE

DW

ITH

LO

OP

NU

MB

ER

).

RS

23

2

I-23 August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

TITLEInstallation Wiring DiagramMulti-Loop I/0 Motherboard(PEGAsys)DRAWING No.06-235443-012REVISIONABSHEET2 of 2

I/O

MO

DU

LE

MO

DU

LE

RX

/TX

I-24August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

TITLEInstallation Wiring DiagramAddressable Contact Input DeviceNO/NC (Obsolete)DRAWING No.06-234563-003REVISIONBBSHEET1 of 1

PR

OT

EC

TIV

EC

OV

ER

ING

GR

AY

OR

AN

GE

BR

OW

N

WH

ITE

TO

CA

TH

OD

E

TO

AN

OD

E

TO

RE

MO

TE

LE

D

TO

RE

MO

VE

CO

NTA

CT

DE

VIC

E

N/O

EO

LB

N

WH

EO

LS

EE

NO

TE

3

UL

LA

BE

L

TY

PIC

AL

CO

NF

IGU

RA

TIO

NS

BK

RD

SE

EN

OT

E1

N.O

.C

ON

TA

CT

DE

VIC

ES

MA

NU

AL

PU

LL

STA

TIO

N

WA

TE

RF

LO

W

SE

EN

OT

E3

EO

L

EO

L

NO

TE

S

1.

RE

DA

ND

BLA

CK

WIIR

ES

AR

EN

ON

-PO

LE

RIZ

ED

PO

WE

RIN

PU

TS

.R

EF

ER

TO

RX

/TX

(CA

T.N

O.30-4

02001-0

00)

WIR

ING

DIA

GR

AM

FO

RC

ON

NE

CT

ION

TO

SM

AR

TD

ET

EC

TO

RM

ULT

IPLE

XT

RU

NK

CIR

CU

ITA

ND

CIR

CU

ITC

HA

RA

CT

ER

IST

ICS

.

2.

SU

PE

RV

ISE

DLIN

EF

OR

RE

MO

TE

CO

NTA

CT

DE

VIC

EC

ON

NE

CT

ION

.C

AU

TIO

N:C

ON

TA

CT

DE

VIC

EM

US

TB

EIN

TH

ES

AM

ER

OO

MA

SA

DD

RE

SS

AB

LE

CO

NTA

CT

INP

UT

DE

VIC

E,W

ITH

ALL

WIR

ING

EN

CLO

SE

DIN

CO

ND

UIT

,A

ND

AM

AX

IMU

MLE

NG

TH

OF

150

FT.

3.

EO

LR

ES

IST

OR

:820

OH

M.5

WA

TT

(FE

NW

AL

PA

RT

NO

.06-1

29025-0

01)

4.

TO

RE

MO

TE

LE

D(F

EN

WA

LP

AR

TN

O.70-4

10001-0

00)

OB

SE

RV

EP

OLA

RIT

Y:O

RA

NG

E(A

NO

DE

),G

RA

Y(C

AT

HO

DE

)C

AU

TIO

N:LE

DM

US

TB

EIN

TH

ES

AM

ER

OO

MA

SA

DD

RE

SS

AB

LE

CO

NTA

CT

INP

UT

DE

VIC

E,W

ITH

ALL

WIR

ING

EN

CLO

SE

DIN

CO

ND

UIT

AN

DA

MA

XIM

UM

LE

NG

TH

50F

T..

LE

DC

IRC

UIT

ISN

OT

SU

PE

RV

ISE

D.

5.

MA

XIM

UM

CU

RR

EN

TR

EQ

UIR

EM

EN

TS

310uA

380uA

6.

SM

AR

TD

ET

EC

TO

RP

RO

DU

CT

NO

. ’S

70-4

0X

XX

X-X

XX

AN

D71-4

0X

XX

X-X

XX

MA

YB

EM

IXE

DO

NT

HE

SA

ME

MU

LT

IPLE

XT

RU

NK

CIR

CU

IT,B

UT

SH

ALL

NO

TE

XC

EE

D255

TO

TA

LD

EV

ICE

SP

ER

CIR

CU

IT,2040

PE

RS

YS

TE

M.

7.

TY

PIC

AL

PU

LE

SR

AT

E:

NO

RM

AL:

9S

EC

ON

DS

ALA

RM

:2

SE

CO

ND

ST

RO

UB

LE

:N

OLE

DP

ULS

ING

8.

RE

FE

RT

OS

YS

TE

MO

PE

RA

TIO

NM

AN

UA

LF

OR

AP

PLIC

AT

ION

OF

AD

DR

ES

SA

BLE

CO

NTA

CT

INP

UT

DE

VIC

E.

9.

WIR

ING

INF

OR

MA

TIO

NS

HO

WN

FO

R70-4

07002-0

0X

TH

RU

70-4

07004-0

0X

.

STA

ND

BY

ALA

RM

CA

T.

NO

.D

ES

CR

IPT

ION

-00

0N

OR

MA

LLY

OP

EN

-00

1N

OR

MA

LLY

CL

OS

ED

FO

RS

UP

ER

VIS

OR

YU

SE

ON

LY

I-25 August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

TITLEInstallation Wiring DiagramAddressable Relay Output Device(Obsolete)DRAWING No.06-234563-001REVISIONBASHEET1 of 1

PR

OT

EC

TIV

EC

OV

ER

ING

UL

LA

BE

L

RD

BK

SE

EN

OT

ES

1&

9

NO

TE

S

1.

RE

DA

ND

BLA

CK

WIIR

ES

AR

EN

ON

-PO

LE

RIZ

ED

PO

WE

RIN

PU

TS

.R

EF

ER

TO

RX

/TX

(CA

T.N

um

ber

30-4

02001-0

00

&74-2

00005-0

01)

WIR

ING

DIA

GR

AM

FO

RC

ON

NE

CT

ION

TO

SM

AR

TD

ET

EC

TO

RM

ULT

IPLE

XT

RU

NK

CIR

CU

ITA

ND

CIR

CU

ITC

HA

RA

CT

ER

IST

ICS

.

2.

RE

LA

YO

UT

PU

TS

AR

EN

OT

SU

PE

RV

ISE

D.

RA

TIN

G:2A

,30

VD

C(R

ES

IST

IVE

).6

A,120

VA

C(R

ES

IST

IVE

)

3.

MA

XIM

UM

CU

RR

EN

TR

EQ

UIR

EM

EN

TS

:S

TA

ND

BY

:325uA

4.

5.

TY

PIC

AL

PU

LS

ER

AT

E:

RE

LA

YR

ES

ET

(STA

ND

BY

):9

SE

CO

ND

SR

ELA

YS

ET:

2S

EC

ON

DS

TR

OU

BLE

STA

TE

:N

OLE

DP

ULS

ING

6.

RE

FE

RT

OS

YS

TE

MO

PE

RA

TIO

NM

AN

UA

LF

OR

AP

PLIC

AT

ION

OF

AD

DR

ES

SA

BLE

RE

LA

YO

UT

PU

T

7.

MO

UN

TS

IN4

“S

QU

AR

EE

LE

CT

RIC

AL

BO

X.

8.

MU

ST

BE

INS

TA

LLE

DIN

AU

.L.LIS

TE

DG

AN

GB

OX

..

9.

WIR

ING

INF

OR

MA

TIO

NS

HO

WN

FO

R70-4

08002-0

00

TH

RU

70-4

08003-0

00.

SM

AR

TD

ET

EC

TO

RP

RO

DU

CT

NO

.’S

70-4

0X

XX

X-X

XX

AN

D71-4

0X

XX

X-X

XX

MA

YB

EM

IXE

DO

NT

HE

SA

ME

MU

LT

IPLE

XT

RU

NK

CIR

CU

IT,B

UT

SH

ALL

NO

TE

XC

EE

D255

TO

TA

LD

EV

ICE

SP

ER

CIR

CU

IT,2040

PE

RS

YS

TE

M.

CA

UT

ION

:…

LE

D(S

EE

NO

TE

5)

FIE

LD

CO

NN

EC

TIO

N

N.C

.

CO

M.

N.O

.

BR

OW

N(

N/C

)

OR

AN

GE

(C

OM

)

WH

ITE

(N

/O)

SE

EN

OT

E2

I-26August 1999

76-100016-001

PEGA

sysIntelligent Suppression C

ontrol/Fire Alarm System

TITLEInstallation W

iring Diagram

Addressable Contact Input D

eviceN

O/N

CD

RAW

ING

No.

New

Design

REVISIO

N-SH

EET1 of 1

MO

DE

LA

I,N

/O

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

SE

EIN

STA

LL

AT

ION

CA

T.

NO

.7

0-4

07

00

8-0

01

Sm

art

On

eT

M

FO

RS

ER

VIC

ES

EN

DT

O:

KID

DE

-FE

NW

AL

,IN

C.

40

0M

AIN

ST.

AS

HL

AN

D,

MA

01

72

1

DA

TE

OF

MA

NU

FA

CT

UR

E:

MA

X.

INS

TA

LL

.T

EM

P.

12

0°F

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

06

-23

55

78

-00

1

PCPCPCPC(+)(-)(+)(-)

8

A

SW

B

SW(+)LED

(-)LED

Remote LED(Optional)

PC LineIn

(+)

(-)

(+)

(-)PC Line

Out

EOL

(Listed 10K Resistor)Ω

Typical N.O. InitiatingDevices

See Notes: 1, 2, and 4

See Note 3

Typical N.C. SupervisoryDevices

ALL

TE

RM

INA

LS

AR

EP

OW

ER

LIM

ITE

D

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

PCPCPCPC(+)(-)(+)(-)

8

A

SW

B

SW(+)LED

(-)LED

EOL

(Listed 10K Resistor)Ω

See Note 3

See Note 7

AI, N/O AI, N/C

NOTES

1. Maximum 25Ω resistance per wire forinitiating circuit. For a total circuit wiringresistance of 50Ω max.

2. Terminal connection supports wiringfrom #18 AWG (0.75 mm2) to #14 AWG(1.5 mm2)

3. Refer to Control Panel Manual foraddressable loop wiring specification.

4. Maximum 10 VDC @ 1 mA.5. This module will not support 2-wire

smoke detectors.6. N/O initiating device circuit is NFPA

Class B/Style B.7. Rating on LED circuit: 26 VDC Max. 7

mA Max. If not used leave terminalsopen circuit.

8. All wiring is power limited and super-vised.

9. The AI, N/C Device is intended for usewithin the control equipment providingthe normally closed contact.

10. The initiating device and remote LEDannunciator (if used) must be located inthe same room as the AI.

11. Use Listed 10K Ohm end-of-line resistor,P/N 06-129025-003.

I-27August 1999

76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm

SystemPEG

Asys

TITLEInstallation W

iring Diagram

Addressable Relay O

utput Device

DR

AWIN

G N

o.N

ew D

esignR

EVISION

-SHEET

1 of 1 MO

DE

LA

O

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

SE

EIN

STA

LL

AT

ION

CA

T.

NO

.7

0-4

08

00

4-0

01

Sm

art

On

eT

M

FO

RS

ER

VIC

ES

EN

DT

O:

KID

DE

-FE

NW

AL

,IN

C.

40

0M

AIN

ST.

AS

HL

AN

D,

MA

01

72

1

DA

TE

OF

MA

NU

FA

CT

UR

E:

MA

X.

INS

TA

LL

.T

EM

P.

12

0°F

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

06

-23

55

77

-00

1

PCPCPCPC(+)(-)(+)(-)N/CCOMN/O

PC LineIn

(+)

(-)

(+)

(-)PC Line

Out

See Note 3

N/O

COM

N/C

FieldConnections

TE

RM

INA

LS

5-7

AR

EP

OW

ER

LIM

ITE

D

TE

RM

INA

LS

1-4

AR

EP

OW

ER

LIM

ITE

D

7

6

5

See Note 3

NOTES

1. AO must be installed in the sameroom as the device it is controlling .

2. Terminal connection supports wiringfrom #18 AWG (0.75 mm2) to #14AWG (1.5 mm2)

3. Refer to Control Panel Manual foraddressable loop wiring specifica-tion.

4. PC Line wiring is power limited andsupervised.

I-28August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

(THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)

J-1 August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

APPENDIX JPEGAsys NETWORK INTERFACE CARD

J-1 INTRODUCTIONThe PEGAsys Network Interface Card (NIC) provides the capa-bility for peer-to-peer communication between PEGAsys fire/suppression control panels (nodes). The NIC mounts as adaughter card on the PEGAsys Central Control Module (CCM).Up to 32 nodes may be networked to form groups. Groups arenumbered logical groupings that delineate the extended cover-age area and simplify programming.

KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721

D

NETWORK INTERFACE CARDCAT. NO. 74-200036-001

TB3

B2IA2

TB4

B2NA2

TB2

B1NA1

TB1

B1IA1

U11

C26

U16

1

U17

1

RV2

RV1

RV3

R26

K1

U181

U201

R2

1

U21

1

R41

Q2

R40

Q3

C1

0

R4

3R

42

R18U61

U14

1

C8

R7

Q4

C9

U19 1

U151

Q1

C7

R1

R44

R17

RV

11

R2

4

RV

12

E8

RV

10 RV8RV6

E4

E7

R2

5

R5

R6

R20

R22

RV5

RV4

E3

E2

E5

E6

R4

R3

R36

RV9

RV7

K2

K4

R2

3

CR2

K3

CR1

U5

1

C1

8

R1

3

R2

U4

1

U8

1

R29

R38

C24

R19

C17

+

R27

U9

1

R32

R12

U10

1

R28

C22

C16

C15

R31

C25 C1

R1

5

R3

3

R34

C14

R1

4

U2

1

C2

3

U7

1

C20

+

C2

E1

C11

C5

C3 + C4

+

R45

U13

1

R46

C27

U12

1

C12

CR

3

Y1

TP2

+5

TP6

I2

TP4

N1

TP5

N2

TP3

I1

U3

1

C13

R10

TP1

GND

J1 DS2

N1

DS4

N2

DS3

I2

DS1

I1

Figure J-1. Network Interface Card (NIC)

Each PEGAsys control panel which is a network node (i.e.,equipped with a NIC) may be assigned to a designated networkgroup (numbered 1 through 32) or to network group 0. Whenan event occurs at a node, notification of the particular alarm,trouble, abort, etc., will be delivered to each of the other nodeson the network in the form of a message.

J-2 CONFIGURATION/ADDRESSING

J-2.1 OverviewEach node can be configured independently using any of thethree methods described in the following paragraphs. The con-figuration process is dealt with in more detail in the PEGAsysConfiguration Software (PCS) Program User's Guide (76-014),which should be referred to.

Note that it is not possible to download configuration informa-tion to all the NICs on a network simultaneously. Each NIC (node)must be configured independently.

The operator can set network configuration options on thePEGAsys(s) in three ways: Via the keypad on the Central Control Module. Via PCS. Via a dumb terminal.Below are the network options which can be configured for eachnode and which are stored in that panel's memory. Paragraphsdetailing each option follow. Network Style: None, Single-Channel (Style 4),

or Redundant Channel (Style 7). Node number: 0 to 32 Network group number: 0 to 32 Processing of network RESET messages:

Enabled/Disabled Processing of network SILENCE messages:

Enabled/Disabled Logging all events: Enabled/Disabled. Time resynchronization (resynch) period Central Station

J-2.1.1 NETWORK STYLE

Both of the two independent data channels can be enabled (Style7), or either one of the channels can be disabled (Style 4). Thesedata channels transmit network information from one node tothe next, or bi-directionally if nodes are connected on eitherside of the transmitting node. In Style-7 configuration, data trans-fer is redundant so that if there is a failure on one channel, or itscable, the other channel will maintain communication.

J-2.1.2 NODE NUMBER ASSIGNMENT

Nodes may be assigned a number from 0 to 32. Number 0 (thedefault) means that the node does not participate in any net-work activity. Any assignment from 1 to 32 means that the nodeactively participates in all pre-configured network activity.

J-2.1.3 NETWORK GROUP NUMBER ASSIGNMENT

Nodes may be assigned to groups 0 through 32. A node as-signed to network group 0 receives and processes messagesreceived from all nodes only if configured to Log All Events. Anode assigned to groups 1 through 32 will process only thosemessages from nodes in the same network group unless con-figured to Log All (Network) groups .

J-2.1.4 RESET ENABLE/DISABLE

Enabling RESET on a node means that it can be reset from anyother node in its group. If it is assigned to network group 0, itcan be reset from any node on the network.

J-2August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

J-2.1.5 SILENCE ENABLE/DISABLE

Enabling SILENCE on a node means that it can be silencedfrom any other node in its group. If it is assigned to networkgroup 0, it can be silenced from any node on the network.

J-2.1.6 EVENT LOGGING ENABLE/DISABLE

Enabling Log All Events causes all network events to be loggedat this node. This includes the receipt of an ACKNOWLEDGEfrom a button on a remote node. Disabling will result in loggingevents only in its own (non-zero) group.

J-2.1.7 TIME RESYNCHRONIZATION PERIOD(SET IN MINUTES)

A time-resynchronization message is broadcast on the network atintervals determined by the resynch period. If a node does notreceive a resynchronization message during this interval, it usesits network connection to ask for the time, or uses its own locallystored time if its query does not result in a resynch message.

J-2.1.8 CENTRAL STATION OPERATION

A node can be configured as a central station if that node isproperly connected to a Silent Knight DACT, Model 5104. Cen-tral Station configuration automatically forces that node to LogAll Events and also MP04, a volt-free relay on the CCM, is con-figured to activate on any alarm on any node in the network.

J-2.2 Configuring Networking Optionsvia the Display/Keypad

Configuration can be performed through the system menus,accessible using a panels built-in membrane keypad and LCDdisplay panel. The software will initially use default values, withnetworking style set to None until changed by an operator.

J-2.2 PEGAsys Panel Network MenusThe menu structure of the PEGAsys has been upgraded toaccommodate network configuration. All of the network optionslisted in Paragraph J-2.1 are configurable via the front panel

3. SET

1. TIME:DATE

2. PRINTER

3. DEVICES

5. DCC's

7. NETWORK

4. PROGRAMMING

7. CLEAR EVENTS

9.CLR RMT EVENTS

2. NODE NUMBER

1. STYLE

3. GROUP

4. ADD/RMV NODES

5. RESET EVENT

6. SILENCE EVENTS

9. ISOLATE

7. LOG EVENTS

CH1: ENABLE/DISABLE CH2: ENABLE/DISABLE

NODE NUMBER ( 1 TO 64) 0: STAND ALONE

GROUP NUMBER ( 1 TO 64) 0: NOT GROUPD

ADD OR REMOVE NODE#__ TO NODE# __

ENABLE/DISABLE NETWORK RESET

ENABLE/DISABLE NETWORK SILENCE

1:ISOLATE NODE 2:DE-ISOLATE NODE

8. RESYNC PERIOD SET RESYNC: 0(off) OR 1-60000 MIN

LOG ALL GROUP OR ONLY NETWORK EVENTS

REMOVE QUEUED EVENTS RECIEVED FROM NODE #___

Figure J-2. Network Menu

J-3 August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

membrane keypad. In addition, the menu provides the ability toadd or remove individual or groups of nodes to/from the net-work. The additions to the PEGAsys menu structure are dia-gramed in Figure J-2.

J-2.3 Configuring Networking Options via PCSConfiguration of all CCM parameters, including network param-eters, can be accomplished using PCS. The software will ini-tially use default values, with networking Style set to Noneuntil changed by an operator.

See the PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS) Program User'sGuide (76-014) for details.

J-2.4 Configuring Networking Optionsvia a Dumb Terminal

Control panel configuration can be performed through use ofthe system menus using a dumb terminal attached to the se-rial PC Port. The software will initially use default values, withnetworking style set to None until changed by an operator.

NOTE: Menus cannot be accessed with an alarmcondition in effect.

J-3 OPERATIONNetworked PEGAsys panels may be configured to communi-cate differently depending on Whether they are assigned to network group 0 or to groups

1 through 32, Whether they are communicating with other

panels in their local group, Or with panels in a remote group.Table J-1 sets forth these relationships. In more detail, how-ever: A node which receives the network message from another

node in the same non-zero group, will process the networkmessage appropriately, depending on its own installed pro-

gram. The ACKNOWLEDGE function will be automatic, theSILENCE and RESET functions must be enabled in PE-GAsys Configuration Software (PCS), or by using thepanels membrane keypad and LCD display panel.

A node in a different non-zero network group configured tolog all groups will process network message(s) from anynode in the entire network, depending on its own installedprogram. ACKNOWLEDGE is automatic, however SI-LENCE and RESET functions must be enabled in PEGA-sys Configuration Software (PCS), or by using the panelsmembrane keypad and LCD display panel.

A node in network group zero, the default group, will not berecognized by any other nodes in network group zero forfunctions other than receiving messages unless it is con-figured to log all groups in PEGAsys Configuration Soft-ware (PCS).

Refer to Table J-1 for a summary of these relationships. Nodes can be added or deleted from network only via Net-

work Menu.

J-4 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTIONThis section describes the hardware used to implement thePEGAsys Network: Central Control Module (CCM) CPU Board Network Interface Card (NIC) Network Wiring

J-4.1 Central Control Module CPU BoardThe CCM board is a slightly modified version of the originalCPU board designed so that the NIC will plug in as a daughterboard. This modification has no effect on normal operation ofthe PEGAsys panel or system.

J-4.2 Network Interface Card (NIC)The NIC contains the hardware necessary for data-communi-cation between network nodes. The channel is an EIA-485 bus

noitacoLedoNetomeR KCA ECNELIS TESER STR/COE/STNEVEGOL

nwohssaderugifnocfisedonetomermorfstnevednasehsupnottubtpeccalliwti,puorgorez-nonanisiedonafI:woleb

0puorgnisedonllA L L,ES L,ER L

puorgemasnisedonllA seY ES ER seY

spuorgtnereffidnisedonllA L L,ES L,ER L

:wolebnwohssaderugifnocfisedonetomermorfstnevednasehsupnottubtpeccalliwti,0puorgnisiedonafI

spuorgllanisedonllA L L,ES L,ER L

".spuorGllAgoL"otderugifnocsiedonfI:L.elbanEECNELISetomerrofderugifnocsiedonfI:ES

elbanETESERetomerrofderugifnocsiedonfI:ER

Table J-1. Network Configuration Table

J-4August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

line. Each node uses one (1) NIC. The NIC performs the follow-ing functions: Dual Channel Support Messaging Repeater Fail Safe Isolation

TA1

ISOLATEDNETWORK MEDIUM

TA2

NON-ISOLATEDNETWORK MEDIUM

HardwareRepeater

Logic

Rx/Tx SelectionLogic

1/2 NETWORK INTERFACE CARD (NIC)

To CCM CPU

TB2TB1

Rx out Rx out

Tx in Tx in

DriverEnable

DriverEnable

RTS Rx Tx

Figure J-3. NIC Block Diagram(Shown With Power To NIC Lost)

J-4.2.1 DUAL CHANNEL SUPPORT

The NIC optionally supports operation of Style-4 or Style-7 chan-nels. Under normal operation with Style 7, network communi-cation is divided between the two channels. In case of a shortcircuit or a break in any of the connecting wires, either channelby itself can execute all network communications, althoughsomewhat more slowly than if both channels are in operation.

J-4.2.2 MESSAGING

When a node wishes to transmit over a network channel, thedata is written to the NIC which sends the signals out to the busfor receipt by remote NICs. While a node is not transmittingdata, the NIC reads the bus data traffic, and converts it to aform readable by the nodes software. Data communication willbe configured on the NICs UART as 8 bits, no parity, 1 stop bit(8-N-1), and 9600 baud. The NIC will either transmit locally pro-duced data or receive and retransmit bus activity as a repeater.

J-4.2.3 REPEATER (TRANSCEIVER)

The NIC acts as a repeater, regenerating bus information as itmoves through the NIC. Its bidirectional repeater function isimplemented completely in hardware; no software is needed tocontrol this process. The transceivers transmit and receiveswitching (in half-duplex mode) is also performed automaticallyby hardware.

J-4.2.4 FAIL SAFE

If a power failure occurs in a node, the NIC includes a normallyclosed (NC) relay which maintains the communications integ-rity of the network. When the NIC loses power, the relay passesthe network signals directly through the board. While the node

without power will not participate in networking, this pass-throughfunction allows all other network nodes to function normally whileproviding the proper trouble indications.

J-4.2.5 ISOLATION

One half of each channel is an isolated, floating RS-485 trans-ceiver and the other half is a non-isolated, grounded RS-485transceiver. This assures that the chassis of any two nodes arephysically disconnected, eliminating the possibility of ground-loop current, while retaining the ability to detect ground faults.

J-4.3 Network WiringThe panels are networked by attaching two twisted, shielded-pair cables between the appropriate NICs. The node-to-nodewire must not exceed a length of 4000 ft. and must be AWG 18or heavier gauge. Under adverse conditions (for example, highelectrical noise) shielded twisted pairs may be required. Con-nect panels together as shown in Figure J-4.

B1IA1B2IA2B1NA1B2NA2

NETWORKINTERFACECARD

CCM CPU BOARD

PEGAsys PANELPEGAsys PANEL

B1IA1B2IA2B1NA1B2NA2

NETWORKINTERFACECARD

CCM CPU BOARD

Channel 1

Channel 2

Note A

Note B

Note A: Attach the shields on the 'N' side of the network line to the grounding screw on the CCM.Note B:Note C:

The shields on the 'I' side of the network line are to be cut short and left floating.All circuits are supervised and power limited.

Figure J-4. Network Wiring

J-5 MAINTENANCE AND/OR REPLACEMENTNo maintenance is required. In the event of failure, the moduleshould be returned to the factory for repair or replacement.

J-5 August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

J-6 PARTS LISTThe NIC Installation Kit (P/N 76-100036-500) consists of thefollowing:

noitpircseD rebmuNtraP

)CIN(draCecafretnIkrowteN 005-630002-47

.ni-4/3,ffodnatSnolyNni-panS 100-241811-60

ssarBsseldaehT23-8detalplekciN,ffodnatS

100-341811-60

.ni-4/1-1x23-8rehsaWhtiwwercS

030-611052-60

teehSnoitallatsnI 100-848532-60

J-7 INSTALLATIONThe NIC is installed as a daughter board to the CCM board.After this is accomplished, the panels are wired together usingtwisted, shielded-pair cable, AWG-18 or heavier. Shieldedtwisted pair is recommended to reduce interference caused byelectrical noise in the vicinity of the wires.

For full Style-7 operation, two twisted pair cables must connecteach pair of panels, as shown in Figure J-4. Single-channeloperation (using only one twisted pair cable between NICs) ispossible and provides Style-4 operation. With single-channeloperation, an open circuit on any network wire will effectivelybreak the network into two separate peer-to-peer networks, bothfunctional and both reporting troubles.

J-7.1 NIC InstallationCAUTION

PEGAsys system installation applications requirethat when a NIC is installed, pre-discharge andrelease-state activation, as well as abort-stateactivation are limited to the originating fire-alarmcontrol panel.

NOTE: Determine whether you have a newer or older CCM; anew CCM can be recognized by a single-line 20 pinheader on the top edge on right side of board. If thenetworking upgrade is for an older system, the newCCM and Network Interface Card (NIC) will be sepa-rate. First replace the old CCM with the new CCM andthen install the NIC. See following instructions for NICinstallation.

CAUTION

Many electronic components are subject to damagefrom electrostatic discharge (ESD). Thesecomponents are not to be removed from theirprotective wrappings until they are to be installedin their respective equipment locations, and thenonly by personnel connected to earth ground.

NOTE: For proper network configuration it is necessary to useversion 7.X of PCS, PEGAsys Configuration Software.For complete information on this aspect of installationsee the PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS) Pro-gram Users Guide (P/N 06-235766-001). As of thisdate, version 7.X of PCS is required for proper con-figuration.

J-7.2 Required ToolsSome or all of the following tools will be required to performremoval and installation.1. Small flat-blade screwdriver.2. 6" flat-blade screwdriver.3. No. 2 Philips screwdriver.4. Wire striper.5. Small needle nose pliers.6. Ground strap (wrist strap) for ESD protection.7. IC chip extraction tool.

J-7.3 Central Control Module.The PEGAsys panel will be delivered with a separate networkinterface card; some existing panels can also can be retrofittedwith a network interface card. Following are instructions bothfor replacement of complete CCM modules, and for installing aNIC in an existing CCM module. The CCM module consists ofboth the CPU panel and its attached LCD display and keypadassembly.

J-7.4 Removing And Replacing A Complete CCMModule

The old CCM module can removed as a whole and replacedwith a new module. The following provides the procedure forremoving the and replacing a complete CCM module1. Ensure that all programming is saved using PEGAsys Con-

figuration Software (PCS). For the proper procedure, seethe PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS) Program UsersGuide (P/N 06-235766-001).

2. Ensure that the power supply EPROM is of a version com-patible with PEGAsys networking. See Note above.

3. Put on a properly grounded ESD-protective wrist strap.4. Disconnect plugs from the I/O Port and Rx/Tx port, and

P.C. port. Make note of each wire and cable connection foruse during reassembly

5. Remove the remaining wiring from CCM panel.6. Remove the six mounting screws while holding the CCM

assembly in place.7. Remove CCM assembly from cabinet.8. Remove new CCM assembly from packing and inspect for

physical damage. If undamaged...9. Install new CCM in the reverse order of removal making

sure that each wire and cable is properly reconnected.10. Reinstall programming and configure the network using

PCS. See J-2.

J-6August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

J-7.5 Installing a NIC in an existing CCM Module1. Ensure that all programming is saved using PCS software.2. Put on a properly grounded ESD-protective wrist strap.3. Remove power from panel but be sure the chassis remains

grounded.4. Remove 4 nylon screws holding membrane keypad and

remove membrane by pulling it straight out of its connec-tor.

5. Remove the 6 threaded spacers that secure the displayelectronics board and lift board out. Do not disconnect board- let it hang down. Data and power lines will remain con-nected.

6. Insert the three plastic standoffs that were included withthe NIC into the holes shown in Fig J-5.

7. Carefully plug the NIC into the 20-pin receptacle and ontothe plastic standoffs.

8. Secure upper right corner of NIC with long screw andspacer. Spacer will separate NIC and the CCM board andscrew will go through to the panel.

9. Replace the display electronics board and reattach the 6threaded spacers.

10. Carefully plug in the membrane keypad and attach the 4screws. Make sure pins and receptacle are properly aligned.

11. Attach network wiring as previously described.12. Reinstall programming and configure the network using

PCS. See J-2.

PORTP.C.

PORTPRINT

PORTDISP

PO

RT

I/O

RX

/TX

PO

RT

INSERT PLASTIC

STANDOFFS HERE

20-PIN RECEPTACLEFOR NIC

DISPLAY PORT

PRINT PORT

P.C. PORT

I/O PORT

Rx/Tx PORT

LONG SCREWAND SPACER

THROUGH HERE

Figure J-5. CCM Board ShowingNIC Attachment Points

J-7.6 Replacing Firmware ChipsFor complete instructions, see PEGAsys Firmware Upgradedatasheet (P/N 06-235763-001). This document covers the CCMEPROM. Be sure to follow ESD prevention procedures.

J-8 POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTSThe NIC is powered by the panel to which it is attached via theCCM board. No other power connections are required.

J-9 TESTINGTesting is a function of the PEGAsys system in which the NIC isinstalled. No local test functions exist. For more information ontesting the NIC and the network, see the PEGAsys Configura-tion Software (PCS) Program User's Guide.

J-10 SPECIFICATIONSInput Voltage 24 VDC

Supervisory Current 50 mA max.

Alarm Current 50 mA max.

K-1 August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

APPENDIX KADDRESSABLE SIGNAL/SOUNDER MODULE

K-1 INTRODUCTIONThe SmartOne Addressable Signal/Sounder Module (ASM) isan intelligent field device that contains its own microprocessor,4K of memory, and all necessary electronics to provide standardnotification or audio output. Connection is via the SmartOneTM com-patible control panels power/communication line. This compo-nent is a UL Listed field device.

The ASM can be individually field programmed via hardware tosupport notification appliances and NFPA Style Y (Class B) orStyle Z (Class A) operation. See Figure K-2 for audio/auxiliarynotification appliance switch and jumper selections, and NFPAoperation Style Y/Z terminal selections.

NOTE: The ASM is not intended to be used as a releasing deviceand is not compatible with solenoids or squibs.

For installation details and complete electrical and mechanicalspecifications, see the ASM Installation Data Sheet (P/N 06-235717-001).

A B BA

-+-+ + - - +

KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.

ASHLAND, MA 01721 U.S.A.ASHLAND, MA 01721 U.S.A.

CAT. NO. 70-200200-001CAT. NO. 70-200200-001

INSTRUCTIONS P/N 06-235717-001INSTRUCTIONS P/N 06-235717-001

ALL OTHERS - POWER LIMITEDALL OTHERS - POWER LIMITED

DEVICE

ADDRESS #ADDRESS # _ _ _ __ _ _ _AUX./AUDIO MODEAUX./AUDIO MODE

SETTINGS

PC LINE TERMINALS - POWER LIMITEDPC LINE TERMINALS - POWER LIMITED

ADDRESSABLE SIGNAL/SOUNDER MODULE (ASM)ADDRESSABLE SIGNAL/SOUNDER MODULE (ASM)

_ _ _ __ _ _ _

INSTRUCTIONS P/N 06-235717-001INSTRUCTIONS P/N 06-235717-001

ADDRESS #ADDRESS #SETTINGS

AUDIO

P1=1&2

MODE

S1=3 ONS1=3 ON

AUX. INAUX. IN

+ - + -TROUBLE

CKT. -OUTPUT CKT.OUTPUT CKT.

-+ +

AUX./AUDIO MODEAUX./AUDIO MODE

AUXILIARY

MODE

P1=2&3

S1=1&2 ONS1=1&2 ON

PC LINEPC LINE

A B A B

DEVICE

ALL OTHERS - POWER LIMITEDALL OTHERS - POWER LIMITED

CAT. NO. 70-200200-001CAT. NO. 70-200200-001

ASHLAND, MA 01721 U.S.A.ASHLAND, MA 01721 U.S.A.

KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.

FM

APPROVED

R LU

TM

Figure K-1. ASM Front Panel

K-2 ADDRESSING AND REGISTRATIONAs with any SmartOne loop device, addressing is through theKidde hand-held programmer (P/N 74-200013-001) or the PEGA-sys control panel menu/keypad as described in Chapter 2 of thismanual.

Module-programmable parameters include owners-location mes-sage, non-silenceable (waterflow), walk test, drill mode and si-lence. The programming process is described in PEGAsysConfiguration Software (PCS) Program Users Guide, 76-014, (P/N 06-235766-001).

Addressing and programming the module's registration into thePEGAsys system is described in Paragraph 2-8 (and sub-para-graphs) of this manual. Registration of the module at the PEGA-sys panel is mandatory to ensure proper operation.

K-3 OPERATIONOnce installed and configured, the ASM requires little or no main-tenance. The module's 24 VDC or 25/70 VAC modes can bechanged from the factory defaults using switch S1 and jumper P1(See Figure K-1).

K-4 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTIONThe SmartOne Addressable Signal/Sounder Module (ASM) pro-vides a fully supervised remote-output circuit for connection toeither 24 VDC audible/visual notification signaling devices or 25/70.7 V RMS speakers. The module provides continuous internalsupervision of: Alarm contact position Connections to loop voltage and communications Internal power supply Auxiliary power supply connections and status Memory statusThe output circuit is monitored by reverse polarity and will notactuate into a short. If the circuit has a ground fault, open, short ora relay contact failure, the device will transmit a specific troublestatus.

A status LED is mounted on the unit and indicates the output cir-cuit status by a 2 second (active) or 9 second (normal) flash in-terval. A trouble condition inhibits the status LED completely.

K-5 MAINTENANCE OR REPLACEMENTThe ASM is shipped from the factory as an assembled compo-nent and is not field serviceable. Little or no maintenance is re-quired.

Testing is accomplished through the testing capabilities of thePEGAsys panel. See Chapter 5, Troubleshooting and CorrectiveMaintenance, for particulars. In the event of a failure, the moduleshould be replaced.

For replacement, follow the instructions in the ASM InstallationData Sheet.

K-2August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

K-6 PARTS LISTThe following parts are required for installation and operation. Allare supplied with the ASM. Addressable Signal/Sounder Module

P/N 70-200200-001 Front Cover Plate

P/N 06235714-001 End-of-Line (EOL) Resistor, 4.7 K Ohms, 1/2 W

P/N 06-250166-452 End-of-Line (EOL) Resistor, 47 K Ohms, 1/2 W

P/N 06-250166-596 Installation Data Sheet, P/N 06-235717-001

K-7 INSTALLATIONRefer to Figure K-2 and to the ASM Installation Instruction DataSheet.

K-7.1 Installation NotesThe ASM single printed circuit board is intended for indoor useand can be mounted in a North American 4-11/16" electrical box,or 4" square 2-1/8" deep box. The module terminal block will ac-cept #12, #14, #16 and #18 AWG wire (4.0 mm2, 2.5 mm2, 1.5mm2 & 1.0 mm2 respectively). Size #18 AWG being a minimumrequirement. The use of solid wire and an extension ring is rec-ommended.

Strip 1/4" from the ends of all wires that connect to the terminalblock of the module.

1/4“ (6.4mm) NTS

CAUTION

Exposing more than 1/4 of wire may cause a groundfault. Exposing less than 1/4 of wire may result in afaulty connection.

Refer to the National Electrical Code for proper box specifica-tions. ASM volume is 8.94 cubic-inches.

Refer to the RX/TX specifications in the chapters on Operation,and Functional Description for addressable-loop wiring specifica-tions.

Power/Communication (PC) line wiring is power limited and su-pervised. For power-limited circuits, use Type FPL, FPLR, or FPLPcable per Article 760 of the National Electrical Code (NEC).

The note located on the module's product label (ALL OTHERS-POWER LIMITED) must be removed if the module is connectedto a non-power limited supply source.

If the auxiliary notification appliance power source is not powerlimited, the output circuit, auxiliary input circuit, and the troublecircuit are non-power limited. Otherwise, all three circuits arepower limited.

Supervision of audio to ASM must be provided by the audio equip-ment. Power limited or non-power limited amplifier outputs areavailable.

K-7.2 Output Circuit CharacteristicsOutput Circuit Rating

2.0 A max. @ 30.0 VDC

20.0 W @ 70.7 V RMS

20.0 W @ 25.0 V RMS

Maximum Line Resistances(with 12 AWG wire)

daoL)spma(

ecnatsiseR)smho(

htgneL*)teef(

22.0 0.02 k0.21

55.0 0.8 k0.5

00.1 0.4 k5.2

05.1 7.2 k6.0

00.2 0.2 k2.1

* Consider total line lengths from module to field and return.

L-1 August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

APPENDIX LREMOTE DISPLAY CONTROL MODULE

AND REMOTE DISPLAY MODULE

L-1 INTRODUCTIONThis manual contains the information necessary to support thePEGAsys Remote Display Control Module (RDCM)(Figure L-1),P/N 76-300000-502, and Remote Display Module (RDM)(FigureL-2), P/N 76-300000-501. Both modules function as remote ad-dressable adjuncts to the PEGAsys and mimic the main controlpanels LCD and LED front displays. Additionally, the RDCM con-tains system control switches and a tactile response numeric key-pad. These controls match the PEGAsys layout. The RDM doesnot permit operation of the control features (operation is read only).The RDCM is key and password secured with the password neededbeing the one used on the associated PEGAsys panel.

SYSTEMRESET

ACKNOWLEDGESYSTEM

3

8

AC POWER

ALARM

PRE-ALARM

6

1

7

2

SUPERVISORY

SYSTEM TROUBLE

System Status Display

SILENCE

9

4

0

5

SILENCE

SCROLL

R

Figure L-1. RDCM Front Panel

PRE-ALARM

ALARM

AC POWER

R

SILENCE

System Status Display

SYSTEM TROUBLE

SUPERVISORY

SCROLL

Figure L-2. RDM Front Panel

Module installers must be fully factory trained in all aspects ofthe PEGAsys system. Additional supporting documentation isalso contained in this manual and in the PEGAsys Configura-tion Software (PCS) Program, Users Guide 76-014, P/N 06-235766-001.

L-2 GENERAL DESCRIPTIONThe RDCM and RDM communicate with the PEGAsys via anRS-485 interface (one pair #18 AWG, twisted/shielded wire) ina multi-drop configuration capable of supporting up to 15 RDCMdisplay/control and 16 RDM display only modules. The installa-tion can be in any combination of RDCM/RDM modules so long

as the maximum quantity for each module is not exceeded. TheRDCM, in addition to emulation of the PEGAsys LEDs and LCDdisplays, provides remote access to the system and, if pro-grammed, the PEGAsys network panel(s) and menu optionsvia this emulation of the PEGAsys front panel function and nu-meric keys.

Remote power is required and can be provided by the controlpanel PSU or a separate supply UL listed for fire alarm applica-tion. In each instance, remote power is supervised by the RDCMand RDM with failure displayed locally and at the control panel.The units also contain a buzzer with sequencing that followsthe buzzer contained in the control panel.

Either the PEGAsys control panel or one RDCM can be pro-grammed as the master unit to control the system under alarmor fault conditions. Operation of an alternate (non-master) unitwill grant that module exclusive control over the system for 30seconds. Under these conditions, attempts to input from an-other module will prompt a lockout display message on the mod-ule attempting the interrupt. This acts to prevent conflictinginputs. Under all circumstances, the master will be granted im-mediate system control.

L-2.1 Operator InterfaceAll operator interfaces are contained in the front panel assem-bly. Operator inputs are passed to the PEGAsys for processing.

The RDCM operator-interface function keys are: Acknowledge: Acknowledge alarms/troubles and silence

all local buzzers. Silence: Silence signal/audibles after Acknowledge. Reset: Reset latched alarm conditions. Scroll: Review active alarms/troubles.NOTE: Drill operation is available through the PEGAsys

menu.

The RDCM operator interface needed to enter the passwordand access the PEGAsys menu is provided via the alphanu-meric keypad: 0 - 9: Used to enter digits to access PEGAsys menus. Delete: Used to exit menu and correct entries. Enter: Used when selecting from PEGAsys menus.NOTE: Operation of above keys will be hereinafter described.

The RDCM and RDM operator interface status LEDs for moni-toring the PEGAsys and remote modules are: Alarm: Indicates an alarm condition. Trouble: Indicates a trouble condition. Silence: Indicates PEGAsys signal/audibles have been

silenced after Acknowledge. Supervisory: Indicates a supervisory condition. Power-on: Indicates the system is receiving AC power. Pre-alarm: Indicates a smoke or thermal detector is in pre-

L-2August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

alarm condition. CPU fail: Mounted on main PCB and available to the in-

staller only. Indicates RDCM/RDM processor has failed toinitialize.

LED colors used to represent indications are: Red: Alarm. Green: Power-on. Yellow: CPU failure, trouble, silence, supervisory and pre-

alarm.The RDM functions as read only. Therefore, it has a scroll key,but does not provide the other function keys nor an operablekeypad.

L-2.2 InterconnectionThe RDCM and RDM operate on a shared RS-485 bus whichsupports wire runs of up to 4000 ft. from the PEGAsys controlpanel. The primary RS-485 bus from the PEGAsys will supportup to 15 RDCMs and 16 RDMs in any combination not exceed-ing maximum of each module.

L-2.3 AddressingAddress selection is via setting of the 16-way, 4-bit hexadeci-mal coded rotary switch, SW1, mounted on the printed circuitboard. See Figure L-4.

Table L-1. Address Switch Settings

hctiwSgnitteS

MCDR/MDRsserddA

hctiwSgnitteS

MCDR/MDRsserddA

1 10MCDRroMDR 9 90MCDRroMDR

2 20MCDRroMDR A 01MCDRroMDR

3 30MCDRroMDR B 11MCDRroMDR

4 40MCDRroMDR C 21MCDRroMDR

5 50MCDRroMDR D 31MCDRroMDR

6 60MCDRroMDR E 41MCDRroMDR

7 70MCDRroMDR F 51MCDRroMDR

8 80MCDRroMDR 0 61MDR

L-3 OPERATIONBefore proceeding with operations, please become totally fa-miliar with PEGAsys Fire Alarm/Suppression Control Systemmanual, especially the sections on Active Alarm Mode, ActiveSupervisory Trouble Mode, and Active Trouble Mode. Pleasenote differences between latching and non-latching Active AlarmModes.

For RX/TX loop input devices. To set either latching or non-latching, please refer to the PEGAsys Configuration Software(PCS) manual, PCS Operations chapter.

The following example is for latching alarm mode (for theseexamples, assume the device to be manual release, address1004).

In Normal Standby Mode, the display will show:SYSTEM STATUS NORMAL 10:00AM 06-08-99PEGASYS

In practice, the actual local time and date will be presented.

When a RX/TX loop device goes into active alarm, the displaywill show:

1004 ALARM ON - MANUAL RELEASEDefault or user text

L-3.1 Switch FunctionsThe switch functions are listed in sequence of use:

L-3.1.1 ACKNOWLEDGE

All ALARM ON, ALARM OFF, TROUBLE ON/OFF, or SUPER-VISORY ON/OFF messages must be acknowledged by opera-tion of this switch. Multiple alarms must be individuallyacknowledged, all other multiple inputs will default to individualacknowledge, but may be programmed to global acknowledgeby accessing the SET" menu from the PEGAsys or any RDCM.

The RDCM will pass the acknowledge input to the PEGAsyscausing its LED to go from a pulsing to a steady mode, and thebuzzer to silence.

The PEGAsys sends a global command to silence all remoteRDCM/RDM buzzers.

The PEGAsys sends out a global lockout command to all otherRDCMs. This gives the calling device exclusive control over thesystem for 30 seconds. Under these conditions, attempts to in-put from another module will prompt a lockout display message(See Paragraph L-3.1.2 for example) on the module attemptingthe interrupt to prevent conflicting inputs. Under all circum-

Figure L-3. Interconnection of PEGAsys panel, RDM, RDCM(s)

TWISTED SHIELDED CABLE TO CHASSIS/EARTH GROUND.

RDCM/RDM

ASSEMBLY

PIN 1 OF TB1 IS AT TOP OF CONNECTOR

NOTE: ALL CIRCUITS ARE SUPERVISED AND POWER LIMITED

POWER SUPPLY

DCM ASSEMBLY TB1

PINS

AUX.+

24V-

5

6

TB1 PINS

IN

1

8

7

2

ASSEMBLY

RDCM/RDMTIED TOGETHER WHEN

USING THE PANELS

PINS 3 & 4 ARE

POWER SUPPLY

TB1 PINS

OUT

6 54

3IN

7

83

REMOTE

DEVICES

UP TO 31

TB1 PINS

6

1

24

5

-

+

AUX. SUPPLY(IF REQ'D.)

24V

TO TROUBLECONTACTSCLOSED = NORMALOPERATION

PEGAsys

76-100016-001

L-3 August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

stances, the module (or control panel) programmed as the sys-tem master will be granted immediate system control.

The display at the calling device will then show:1004 ALARM ON ACK - MANUAL RELEASEDefault or user text

(The default or user text is that entered at the associated PE-GAsys panel. This message cannot be changed from theRDCM.)

Then the display will show how many active alarms are stillpresent in the system (if any), and subsequently display howmany active trouble conditions are still present in the system (ifany). For example:

001ACTIVE ALARMS REMAINING

Again in the case of multiple alarms (either On or Off), eachevent must be acknowledged separately. In the case of mul-tiple troubles, actuation of the acknowledge input may be sepa-rate or programmed to global acknowledge. A maximum of 32trouble message can be displayed/scrolled at any one time.

For non-latching sequence, each ALARM OFF will display andmust be acknowledged.

1004 ALARM OFF - MANUAL RELEASEDefault or user text

In the event of loss of communications between the RDCM andthe PEGAsys on the RS-485 bus, the local buzzer will soundand the trouble LED will light.

L-3.1.2 SILENCE

When all alarm and trouble conditions have been acknowledged,operation of the silence switch will have the following results:

The RDCM will pass the silence input to the PEGAsys causingall outputs programmed for silence to de-energize.

The PEGAsys sends out a global lockout command to all otherRDCM(s). This gives the calling device exclusive control overthe system for 30 seconds. For these examples, assume RDCMaddress 02. If another (non-master) module attempts an inter-rupt, the following lockout message will display for 5 seconds:

RDCM 02IN CONTROL

NOTE: RDCM 02 is the default. This message can be cus-tomized in PCS. Please refer to the PEGAsys Con-figuration Software (PCS) Program Manual

After the 30 second control period, any other module can pro-vide system inputs (unless a module programmed as systemmaster assumes control).

L-3.1.3 RESET

After all active alarms and troubles have been cleared, inputdevices programmed to the latching sequence will show:

XXXALARMS ACTIVE

Input devices programmed to the non-latching sequence willshow:

NO ACTIVE ALARM REMAINSNow, operation of the reset switch will have the following re-sults:

The RDCM will pass the reset input to the PEGAsys causing allconditions programmed to cancel on reset to de-energize.

The PEGAsys sends out a global lockout command to all otherRDCMs. This gives the calling device exclusive control over thesystem for 30 seconds and displays the following message:

SYSTEM RESETIf there are no further key entries at the calling device (address02), and no further system events are detected, all modulesand the PEGAsys will display the system default message:

SYSTEM STATUS NORMAL 10:00AM 03-08-99PEGASYS

In practice, the actual local time and date will be presented.

In the event of an RDCM's microprocessor going into fault con-dition, actuation of hardware switch S3 located behind the dis-play membrane will cause a hardware reset of themicroprocessor.

L-3.1.4 SCROLL

When the Scroll key is pressed during any active system event,the following will result:

The PEGAsys sends out a global lockout command to all otherRDCM(s). This gives the calling device (address 02) exclusivecontrol over the system as described in reset above.

NOTE: The RDM scroll key does not provide the global lock-out command.

The PEGAsys, RDCMs and RDMs will then be updated by thenext event in the buffer.

When a Scroll key is actuated at any RDCM, RDM or the PE-GAsys, the resulting scroll display is sent globally to the sys-tem. LED Test Feature: With no active inputs, press and hold

the scroll key for 2 seconds. All LEDs will light for 5 sec-onds.

System Information Entry Keys: To enter passwords andgain access the PEGAsys menu functions, the relevant keysare:

Numeric 0-9: Enters password and system function infor-mation.

Enter: Enter information into the system menu. Delete: Exit system menu and correct wrong entries.To enter the password, press the 0 key. The RDCM opens thepassword entry menu and displays:

PLEASE ENTER PASSWORDEach key entry will then display the # character:

PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD####

If the password entry is incorrect, the display will become:PASSWORD ENTRY FAILED

The RDCM will request another password entry request, and, ifcorrect, the PEGAsys will send the 30 second global lockout

L-4August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

command to all other RDCMs.

The calling device (address 02) will then have access to thePEGAsys menu. Please refer to this manual for menu operat-ing instructions.

If during the password entry sequence any key other than thenumeric key (except Delete) is pressed before the Enter key,the PEGAsys will update the RDCM with the default display.

L-3.2 LED Status DisplayThe front panel display LEDs will operate in three modes: Off: No system activity. On Continuously: Acknowledge alarm or trouble. Pulsing: 1 second on, 1 second off; active alarm or trouble.

L-3.3 LCD DisplayWith no active events in the system, all RDCM/RDMs will dis-play the default message:

SYSTEM STATUS NORMAL 10:00am 03-08-99PEGASYS

PEGASYS is the default message. This can be customizedby PCS. Please refer to the PEGAsys Configuration Software(PCS) Program manual.

L-3.4 Password Data StructureTwo system levels are available from the RDCM. These are:Level 1, User Level and Level 2, Installer Level. Please refer tothe Menu Function and Menu Structure sections of the PE-GAsys Fire Alarm/Suppression Control System manual for de-scriptions of the capabilities available through these levels.

Each PEGAsys is shipped from the factory with default pass-words for Level 1 of 987 and Level 2 of 1865. Default pass-words can be customized in the level 2 Set Menu Function.Changing passwords for the system can be accomplished fromany RDCM or directly from the PEGAsys.

L-3.5 RDCM/RDM Local Trouble ConditionsThe RDCM/RDM is supervised for failure of the power supplyand failure to communicate with the PEGAsys during the poll-ing routine. The power failure display is:

REMOTE PSU FAULT ONRDCM XX

If no communication is detected with the PEGAsys during thepolling routine and the PSU is active, a local trouble messagewill be displayed on the RDCM/RDM.

NO COMMUNICATION WITH MAIN PANEL

L-4 SPECIFICATIONS

LACIRTCELE

egatlovtupnI lanimonCDV42

tnerrucyrosivrepuS lanimonAm46

tnerrucmralA lanimonAm58

krowten584-SR morftf0004otpUlenaplortnocTENlawneF

GWA81#gnisueriwdedlehs/detsiwt

sMDR/MCDRmumixaM ynanisMDR61/sMCDR51gnideecxeton,noitanibmoc

eludomhcaerofmumixam

elytsgniriW "B"ssalC,4elytSAPFN

LACINAHCEM

snoisnemiD H"651.7XW"50.21

thgieW zo31,sbl4

LATNEMNORIVNE

erutarepmetgnitarepO 23 o 0(F o 021-)C o 94(F o )C

ytidimuhgnitarepO gnisnednoc-non%58

L-5 INSTALLATION

See Figure L-4.

L-5 August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

12.000

9.500

1.250

5.875

.409

SW1 ADDRESS 1 TO 16 (F)

W1 LED BACKLIGHT ENABLE

VR1 LED BACKLIGHT ADJUST

VR2 LCD CONTRAST ADJUST

SW3

HARDWARE FORGND. CONNECTION

1/2" & 3/4"

COMBINATION KNOCKOUTS

(2) LOCATED ON TOP SURFACE

(1) LOCATED ON EACH SIDE.

FM

APPROVED

RLU

POWER

SUPPLY

TWIS

TEDSHIE

LDEDCABLE

TOCHASSIS

/EARTH

GROUND.

SER. NO.

MOUNTING FOR #10

(.190 DIA.) SCREWS

INSTRUCTION LABEL

CONNECTOR

DS1

Figure L-4. Installation of RDM or RDCM

L-6August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

(THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)

M-1 August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

APPENDIX MADDRESSABLE ALARMLINE MODULE

M-1 INTRODUCTIONThe Addressable AlarmLineTM Module (AAM) permits an Alarm-Line sensor cable to be directly interfaced to the PEGAsys controlpanel. This interface will allow for pre-alarm, alarm, and troubleconditions to be transmitted to the control panel via the RX/TX(Receive/Transmit) loop. The AAM monitors the resistance of thesensor cable and generates a pre-alarm (if enabled), alarm, oroverheat output (if enabled) when the resistance drops below theprogrammed threshold. The module also supervises the Alarm-Line cable for opens and shorts, which will generate a fault condi-tion. All of the pre-alarm, alarm, overheat, and trouble conditionswill be displayed on the Central Control Module (CCM) of thePEGAsys panel. Up to 255 AAM modules can be connected to asingle RX/TX module. Use of multiple AAMs allows flexibility inzoning larger installations for location of alarm and zone outputcontrol; the control panel acts as a central display and control in-terface.

For complete information, please refer to the AlarmLine Addres-sable Linear Heat Detector Installation, Operation and Mainte-nance Manual (73.04).

TM

Figure M-1. Addressable AlarmLine Module Front Panel

M-2 ADDRESSING AND REGISTERINGEach AAM is shipped from the factory with the default addressof 000. This permits connection to the Power Communication(PC) line without interfering with devices already on the loop.Only one device with this default address should be connectedto the PC line at a time. Alternately, the AAM address can bepreset with a hand-held programmer (P/N 74-200013-001) af-ter which the module can be connected to the PC line. If a hand-held programmer is not available, the address can be changeddirectly at the CCM using the procedure outlined in Chapter 2of this manual.

M-3 OPERATIONA change in temperature produces a change in resistance be-tween the loops within the sensor cable (as the temperatureincreases, resistance decreases exponentially). This change iscontinuously monitored by the AAM, which generates an alarmor pre-alarm signal at a predetermined level corresponding tothe temperature set point.

The temperature at which the system will alarm is determinedby selecting one of 16 configuration settings using the controlpanels configuration software or CCM menu options. The ap-propriate configuration setting for a given set point is estab-lished by the use of a nomogram incorporating two know factors: Maximum ambient temperature of the alarm zone Length of the sensor cableThe integrating (averaging) effect of the sensor cable allows itto detect localized hot spot or a low level temperature increaseover the entire length. For more detailed information, pleaserefer to the AlarmLine Addressable Linear Heat Detector Instal-lation, Operation and Maintenance Manual.

M-4 MAINTENANCE OR REPLACEMENTThe AAM is shipped from the factory as an assembled compo-nent and is not field serviceable. Little or no maintenance isrequired.

Refer to Chapters 4 and 5 of this manual and to the AlarmLineAddressable Linear Heat Detector Installation, Operation and Main-tenance Manual for further information on maintenance and test-ing of field devices connected to the FN-2000 panel's RX/TX loop.

M-5 PARTS LISTRefer to Section 9 of the AlarmLine Addressable Linear HeatDetector Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual.

M-6 INSTALLATIONRefer to Paragraph 3-2 of the AlarmLine Addressable LinearHeat Detector Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual.

M-7 TESTINGRefer to Section 7 of the AlarmLine Addressable Linear HeatDetector Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual.

M-2August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

(THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)

N-1 August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

APPENDIX NNETWORKABLE CENTRAL CONTROL MODULE (NCCM)

N-1 INTRODUCTIONThe Networkable Central Control Module (NCCM), shown inFigure N-1, is the heart of the PEGAsys system and is com-posed of two printed circuit board assemblies; the display con-trol module (DCM), and the CCM printed circuit board. TheNCCM is available in two versions, P/N 76-100008-501 forsingle-loop systems and P/N 76-100008-600 for multi-loop sys-tems.

SYSTEMRESET

ACKNOWLEDGESYSTEM

3

8

AC POWER

ALARM

PRE-ALARM

6

1

7

2

SUPERVISORY

SYSTEM TROUBLE

System Status Display

SILENCE

9

4

0

5

SILENCE

SCROLL

R

Figure N-1. Networkable Central Control Module Front Panel

The NCCM is essentially identical to the CCM described earlierin this manual, and has the same capabilities. However, theCCM printed circuit board has been designed to receive theoptional Network Interface Card (See the physical descriptionand menu options in Appendix J of this manual), enabling net-worked operation.

Additionally, the display control module adjunct to the main pro-cessor module provides connection to the Remote Display Con-trol Module (RDCM) and Remote Display Module (RDM)described in Appendix L of this manual.

N-2 CONFIGURATION/FUNCTIONThe CCM PCB controls the operation and supervision of all thesystem modules and software within the PEGAsys system. Itreceives loop device data from the RX/TX module, and systemdata from the optional NIC and/or RDCM. It processes the databased on pre-programmed instructions and transmits outputcommands to the output modules, optional NIC and/or RDCMor RDM modules, loop output devices, and the adjunct displaycontrol module.

The CCM PCB contains the systems CPU, real-time clock,watchdog timer and two serial RS-232 ports: A programminginput/output and a remote printer output port. These ports ac-cept 6-wire RJ-12 modular connectors. PEGAsys Configura-tion Software (PCS) is used to program the system. A multilevelpassword scheme protects the system from unauthorized ac-cess.

The real-time clock provides the NCCM with the ability to dis-

play the current time and date on the system LCD and providesbasic information for real-time operations.

Internal diagnostics enhance the troubleshooting ability of thesystem. Examples include: microprocessor failure, memory fail-ure, RS-232 port troubles, etc. Network diagnostics are sepa-rately controlled and report to appropriate panels.

Two individually programmable signal output circuits (MP1 &MP2) provided are used primarily for signaling devices (horns,bells, strobes) and deliver up to 2.0 amps of 24 VDC power.The MP1 output can be optionally programmed for releasingapplications using solenoid-actuated suppression equipment(agent and sprinkler).

Two individually programmable relay outputs (MP3 & MP4) areprovided on the NCCM for controlling building functions duringalarm occurrences. Relays are Form C, 1 Amp @ 30 VDC rated.

All four NCCM outputs can be programmed via EOC to activatefrom either panel or, if provided, network inputs.

One non-programmable trouble relay is supplied which is nor-mally powered (24 VDC) and will transfer on any system (or, ifprovided, network) trouble, supervisory, pre-alarm and completepower-off condition. Relay is form C style, rated 1 Amp @ 30VDC.

Refer to Appendix I, page I-2, for mechanical installation de-tails.

An event history buffer is provided on the NCCM which will store1024 entries for single-loop and 6100 entries for multi-loop sys-tem events information. Network option does not alter eventlimits however, network events are recorded. The system menupermits operator retrieval of recorded events. The PCS programprovides the ability to download, store and print all or a portionof the event history buffer.

The NCCMs common display module assembly (which is physi-cally and electronically attached to the main processor module)provides the system with the operator interface and, if provided,network interface for control switches, system status LEDs, sys-tem trouble/alarm buzzer, an 80 character (2x40) LCD displayand an integral numeric keypad. The keypad is used for enter-ing the security password and navigating through the usermenus. The system buzzer provides two distinct signaling pat-terns for audible warning of system alarms and troubles.

N-2August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

(THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)

O-1 August 199976-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

APPENDIX OCENTRAL STATION OPERATION

O-1 CENTRAL STATION OPERATIONFor central station operation, the PEGAsys control panel mustbe configured for central station use through PCS menu (Net-work Settings). A Silent Knight DACT Model 5104 must be wiredto the PEGAsys control panel as shown in Figure O-1. See Model5104 Installation Manual for information regarding connectionof the DACT to the telephone line for alarm and troubletransmission(s).

8

9

10

11

12 13

14

15

16

17

18

Silent Knight DACT Model 5104 PCB

PegaSYS CCM PCB

NO NC CFault Relay

NO NC CVolt FreeRelay 2

Zone 3 Alarm

Zone 4 Trouble

4.7k

4.7k

Figure O-1. Wiring for DACT

O-2August 1999 76-100016-001

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

(THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)

220423

(Use this report to indicate deficiencies, user remarks and recommendations relating to the publication. Fold on dotted line, tape and mail toKIDDE-FENWAL, Inc., 400 Main Street, Ashland, MA 01721, Attn. Documentation Manager or FAX to 508-881-8920)

DATE:

1. PART NUMBER 2. VOLUME NO. 3. TITLE (NOMENCLATURE)

4. CHANGE NO. OR REV. DATE 5. SYSTEM/EQUIPMENT 6. PRIORITY OF COMMENT

7. USER EVALUATION

MANUAL IS: EXCELLENT GOOD FAIR POOR COMPLETE INCOMPLETE

8. PROBLEM QUESTION SUGGESTION COMMENT: (check one)

9. RECOMMENDED CHANGE TO PUBLICATION

PAGE PARAGRAPH LINE FIGURE TABLE RECOMMENDED CHANGES AND REASON NO. NO. NO. NO. NO. (Use Blank Continuation Sheets as Required)

10. ORIGINATOR 11. COMPANY NAME

12. ADDRESS

13. KIDDE-FENWAL USE ONLY

a. Received b. Action Necessity c. Priority d. Comments

TECHNICAL MANUAL USER FEEDBACK FORM

220423

KIDDE-FENWAL, Inc.400 Main StreetAshland, MA 01721

Attn. Documentation Manager

PlaceStampHere

FOLD

FOLD

LIMITED WARRANTY STATEMENT

Kidde-Fenwal, Inc. represents that this product is free from defects in material and workmanship, and will repair or replace anyproduct or part thereof which proves to be defective in workmanship or material for a period of twelve (12) months from the dateof purchase but not to exceed eighteen (18) months after shipment by the manufacturer. For a full description of Kidde-Fenwals LIMITED WARRANTY which, among other things, limits the duration of warranties of MERCHANTABILITY and FIT-NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE and EXCLUDES liability for CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, please read the entireLIMITED WARRANTY on the Kidde-Fenwal Quotation, Acceptance of Order, and/or Original Invoice which will become part ofyour sales agreement. Please contact Kidde-Fenwal directly for a return material authorization (RMA) number before returningmaterial to the factory at Ashland, Massachusetts, shipment prepaid. Kidde-Fenwal will repair or replace and ship prepaid.

These instructions do not purport to cover all the details or variations in the equipmentdescribed, nor do they provide for every possible contingency to be met in connection withinstallation, operation and maintenance. All specifications subject to change withoutnotice. Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which arenot covered sufficiently for the purchasers purposes, the matter should be referred toKidde-Fenwal Inc., Ashland, MA.

76-100016-001 Rev. BB ©1998 Kidde-Fenwal Inc. Printed in USA

Fire Systems

Kidde-Fenwal Inc.400 Main StreetAshland, MA 01721(508) 881-2000Fax: (508) 881-8920